Update version number to 7.4.415

Problem:    Cannot build.  Warning for shadowed variable. (John Little)
Solution:   Add missing change.  Remove declaration.

.gitignore

@@ -45,6 +45,9 @@ bcc.cfg
 *.map
 *.tds
 
+# NetBeans
+nbproject/*
+
 # Mac OSX
 src/xxd/xxd.dSYM
 
@@ -55,14 +58,16 @@ src/xxd/xxd.dSYM
 *.swp
 *~
 *.pyc
+*.log
 src/po/vim.pot
 
 # Generated by "make test"
-src/po/*.ck 
-src/testdir/mbyte.vim 
-src/testdir/mzscheme.vim 
-src/testdir/lua.vim 
-src/testdir/small.vim 
-src/testdir/tiny.vim 
+src/po/*.ck
+src/testdir/mbyte.vim
+src/testdir/mzscheme.vim
+src/testdir/lua.vim
+src/testdir/small.vim
+src/testdir/tiny.vim
 src/testdir/test*.out
 src/testdir/test.log
+src/memfile_test

Filelist

@@ -3,6 +3,7 @@
 
 # source files for all source archives
 SRC_ALL =	\
+		.hgignore \
 		src/README.txt \
 		src/arabic.c \
 		src/arabic.h \
@@ -10,6 +11,8 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/blowfish.c \
 		src/buffer.c \
 		src/charset.c \
+		src/crypt.c \
+		src/crypt_zip.c \
 		src/diff.c \
 		src/digraph.c \
 		src/edit.c \
@@ -82,9 +85,13 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/testdir/*.in \
 		src/testdir/sautest/autoload/*.vim \
 		src/testdir/test[0-9]*.ok \
+		src/testdir/test[0-9]*a.ok \
+		src/testdir/test_[a-z]*.ok \
 		src/testdir/test49.vim \
 		src/testdir/test60.vim \
 		src/testdir/test83-tags? \
+		src/testdir/test77a.com \
+		src/testdir/test_*.vim \
 		src/testdir/python2/*.py \
 		src/testdir/python3/*.py \
 		src/testdir/pythonx/*.py \
@@ -98,6 +105,8 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/proto/blowfish.pro \
 		src/proto/buffer.pro \
 		src/proto/charset.pro \
+		src/proto/crypt.pro \
+		src/proto/crypt_zip.pro \
 		src/proto/diff.pro \
 		src/proto/digraph.pro \
 		src/proto/edit.pro \
@@ -284,6 +293,8 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/dosinst.h \
 		src/glbl_ime.cpp \
 		src/glbl_ime.h \
+		src/gui_dwrite.cpp \
+		src/gui_dwrite.h \
 		src/gui_w16.c \
 		src/gui_w32.c \
 		src/gui_w48.c \

runtime/autoload/htmlcomplete.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,49 @@
 " Vim completion script
 " Language:	HTML and XHTML
 " Maintainer:	Mikolaj Machowski ( mikmach AT wp DOT pl )
-" Last Change:	2011 Apr 28
+" Last Change:	2014 Jun 20
+
+" Distinguish between HTML versions.
+" To use with other HTML versions add another "elseif" condition to match
+" proper DOCTYPE.
+function! htmlcomplete#DetectOmniFlavor()
+  if &filetype == 'xhtml'
+    let b:html_omni_flavor = 'xhtml10s'
+  else
+    let b:html_omni_flavor = 'html401t'
+  endif
+  let i = 1
+  let line = ""
+  while i < 10 && i < line("$")
+    let line = getline(i)
+    if line =~ '<!DOCTYPE.*\<DTD '
+      break
+    endif
+    let i += 1
+  endwhile
+  if line =~ '<!DOCTYPE.*\<DTD '  " doctype line found above
+    if line =~ ' HTML 3\.2'
+      let b:html_omni_flavor = 'html32'
+    elseif line =~ ' XHTML 1\.1'
+      let b:html_omni_flavor = 'xhtml11'
+    else    " two-step detection with strict/frameset/transitional
+      if line =~ ' XHTML 1\.0'
+	let b:html_omni_flavor = 'xhtml10'
+      elseif line =~ ' HTML 4\.01'
+	let b:html_omni_flavor = 'html401'
+      elseif line =~ ' HTML 4.0\>'
+	let b:html_omni_flavor = 'html40'
+      endif
+      if line =~ '\<Transitional\>'
+	let b:html_omni_flavor .= 't'
+      elseif line =~ '\<Frameset\>'
+	let b:html_omni_flavor .= 'f'
+      else
+	let b:html_omni_flavor .= 's'
+      endif
+    endif
+  endif
+endfunction
 
 function! htmlcomplete#CompleteTags(findstart, base)
   if a:findstart

runtime/colors/delek.vim

@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
 " Vim color file
-" Maintainer:	David Schweikert <dws@ee.ethz.ch>
-" Last Change:	2006 Apr 30
+" Maintainer:	David Schweikert <david@schweikert.ch>
+" Last Change:	2014 Mar 19
 
 hi clear
 
-let colors_name = "delek"
+let g:colors_name = "delek"
 
 " Normal should come first
 hi Normal     guifg=Black  guibg=White
@@ -28,7 +28,11 @@ hi NonText    ctermfg=Blue	   gui=bold guifg=gray guibg=white
 hi Pmenu      guibg=LightBlue
 hi PmenuSel   ctermfg=White	   ctermbg=DarkBlue  guifg=White  guibg=DarkBlue
 hi Question   ctermfg=DarkGreen    gui=bold guifg=SeaGreen
-hi Search     ctermfg=NONE	   ctermbg=Yellow guibg=Yellow guifg=NONE
+if &background == "light"
+    hi Search     ctermfg=NONE	   ctermbg=Yellow guibg=Yellow guifg=NONE
+else
+    hi Search     ctermfg=Black	   ctermbg=Yellow guibg=Yellow guifg=Black
+endif
 hi SpecialKey ctermfg=DarkBlue	   guifg=Blue
 hi StatusLine cterm=bold	   ctermbg=blue ctermfg=yellow guibg=gold guifg=blue
 hi StatusLineNC	cterm=bold	   ctermbg=blue ctermfg=black  guibg=gold guifg=blue

runtime/colors/industry.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+" Vim color file
+" Maintainer:	Shian Lee 
+" Last Change:	2014 Mar 6 (for vim 7.4)
+" Remark:	"industry" stands for 'industrial' color scheme. In industrial
+"		HMI (Human-Machine-Interface) programming, using a standard color
+"               scheme is mandatory in many cases (in traffic-lights for example): 
+"               LIGHT_RED is	    'Warning' 
+"               LIGHT_YELLOW is	    'Attention' 
+"               LIGHT_GREEN is	    'Normal' 
+"               LIGHT_MAGENTA is    'Warning-Attention' (light RED-YELLOW)
+"               LIGHT_CYAN is	    'Attention-Normal'  (light YELLOW-GREEN).
+"               BLACK is	    Dark-High-Contrast Background for maximum safety.
+"               BLUE is		    Shade of BLACK (not supposed to get attention).
+"
+"               Industrial color scheme is by nature clear, safe and productive. 
+"               Yet, depends on the file type's syntax, it might appear incorrect. 
+
+" Reset to dark background, then reset everything to defaults:
+set background=dark
+highlight clear
+if exists("syntax_on")
+    syntax reset
+endif
+
+let colors_name = "industry"
+
+" First set Normal to regular white on black text colors:
+hi Normal ctermfg=LightGray ctermbg=Black guifg=#dddddd	guibg=Black
+
+" Syntax highlighting (other color-groups using default, see :help group-name):
+hi Comment    cterm=NONE ctermfg=DarkCyan    	gui=NONE guifg=#00aaaa   	 
+hi Constant   cterm=NONE ctermfg=LightCyan   	gui=NONE guifg=#00ffff   	
+hi Identifier cterm=NONE ctermfg=LightMagenta   gui=NONE guifg=#ff00ff   
+hi Function   cterm=NONE ctermfg=LightGreen   	gui=NONE guifg=#00ff00   	
+hi Statement  cterm=NONE ctermfg=White	     	gui=bold guifg=#ffffff	     	
+hi PreProc    cterm=NONE ctermfg=Yellow		gui=NONE guifg=#ffff00 	
+hi Type	      cterm=NONE ctermfg=LightGreen	gui=bold guifg=#00ff00 		
+hi Special    cterm=NONE ctermfg=LightRed    	gui=NONE guifg=#ff0000    	
+hi Delimiter  cterm=NONE ctermfg=Yellow    	gui=NONE guifg=#ffff00    	
+

runtime/compiler/go.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+" Vim compiler file
+" Compiler:	Go
+" Maintainer:	David Barnett (https://github.com/google/vim-ft-go)
+" Last Change:	2014 Aug 16
+
+if exists('current_compiler')
+  finish
+endif
+let current_compiler = 'go'
+
+if exists(':CompilerSet') != 2
+  command -nargs=* CompilerSet setlocal <args>
+endif
+
+let s:save_cpo = &cpo
+set cpo-=C
+
+CompilerSet makeprg=go\ build
+CompilerSet errorformat=
+    \%-G#\ %.%#,
+    \%A%f:%l:%c:\ %m,
+    \%A%f:%l:\ %m,
+    \%C%*\\s%m,
+    \%-G%.%#
+
+let &cpo = s:save_cpo
+unlet s:save_cpo
+
+" vim: sw=2 sts=2 et

runtime/doc/autocmd.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Dec 04
+*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 May 02
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -278,6 +278,7 @@ Name			triggered by ~
 |ShellCmdPost|		after executing a shell command
 |ShellFilterPost|	after filtering with a shell command
 
+|CmdUndefined|		a user command is used but it isn't defined
 |FuncUndefined|		a user function is used but it isn't defined
 |SpellFileMissing|	a spell file is used but it can't be found
 |SourcePre|		before sourcing a Vim script
@@ -465,6 +466,16 @@ BufWriteCmd			Before writing the whole buffer to a file.
 							*BufWritePost*
 BufWritePost			After writing the whole buffer to a file
 				(should undo the commands for BufWritePre).
+							*CmdUndefined*
+CmdUndefined			When a user command is used but it isn't
+				defined.  Useful for defining a command only
+				when it's used.  The pattern is matched
+				against the command name.  Both <amatch> and
+				<afile> are set to the name of the command.
+				NOTE: Autocompletion won't work until the
+				command is defined.  An alternative is to
+				always define the user command and have it
+				invoke an autoloaded function.  See |autoload|.
 							*CmdwinEnter*
 CmdwinEnter			After entering the command-line window.
 				Useful for setting options specifically for
@@ -562,11 +573,15 @@ FileChangedRO			Before making the first change to a read-only
 				It is not allowed to change to another buffer
 				here.  You can reload the buffer but not edit
 				another one.
+							*E881*
+				If the number of lines changes saving for undo
+				may fail and the change will be aborted.
 							*FileChangedShell*
 FileChangedShell		When Vim notices that the modification time of
 				a file has changed since editing started.
 				Also when the file attributes of the file
-				change. |timestamp|
+				change or when the size of the file changes.
+				|timestamp|
 				Mostly triggered after executing a shell
 				command, but also with a |:checktime| command
 				or when Gvim regains input focus.
@@ -666,6 +681,8 @@ FuncUndefined			When a user function is used but it isn't
 				when it's used.  The pattern is matched
 				against the function name.  Both <amatch> and
 				<afile> are set to the name of the function.
+				NOTE: When writing Vim scripts a better
+				alternative is to use an autoloaded function.
 				See |autoload-functions|.
 							*GUIEnter*
 GUIEnter			After starting the GUI successfully, and after
@@ -740,7 +757,7 @@ QuickFixCmdPost			Like QuickFixCmdPre, but after a quickfix
 				command is run, before jumping to the first
 				location. For |:cfile| and |:lfile| commands
 				it is run after error file is read and before
-				moving to the first error. 
+				moving to the first error.
 				See |QuickFixCmdPost-example|.
 							*QuitPre*
 QuitPre				When using `:quit`, `:wq` or `:qall`, before

runtime/doc/change.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Jan 23
+*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Jun 26
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -156,6 +156,9 @@ only after a '.').
 The 'B' and 'M' flags in 'formatoptions' change the behavior for inserting
 spaces before and after a multi-byte character |fo-table|.
 
+The '[ mark is set at the end of the first line that was joined, '] at the end
+of the resulting line.
+
 
 ==============================================================================
 2. Delete and insert				*delete-insert* *replacing*
@@ -824,7 +827,7 @@ either the first or second pattern in parentheses did not match, so either
 <
 
 Substitute with an expression			*sub-replace-expression*
-						*sub-replace-\=* *:s/\=*
+						*sub-replace-\=* *s/\=*
 When the substitute string starts with "\=" the remainder is interpreted as an
 expression.  This does not work recursively: a |substitute()| function inside
 the expression cannot use "\=" for the substitute string.
@@ -1647,7 +1650,7 @@ And a few warnings:
 7. Sorting text						*sorting*
 
 Vim has a sorting function and a sorting command.  The sorting function can be
-found here: |sort()|.
+found here: |sort()|, |uniq()|.
 
 							*:sor* *:sort*
 :[range]sor[t][!] [i][u][r][n][x][o] [/{pattern}/]
@@ -1714,8 +1717,8 @@ Note that using `:sort` with `:global` doesn't sort the matching lines, it's
 quite useless.
 
 The details about sorting depend on the library function used.  There is no
-guarantee that sorting is "stable" or obeys the current locale.  You will have
-to try it out.
+guarantee that sorting obeys the current locale.  You will have to try it out.
+Vim does do a "stable" sort.
 
 The sorting can be interrupted, but if you interrupt it too late in the
 process you may end up with duplicated lines.  This also depends on the system

runtime/doc/cmdline.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Nov 25
+*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Aug 16
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -824,8 +824,8 @@ Note: these are typed literally, they are not special keys!
 		   the start of the function.
 
 							 *filename-modifiers*
-	 *:_%:* *::8* *::p* *::.* *::~* *::h* *::t* *::r* *::e* *::s* *::gs*
-	        *%:8* *%:p* *%:.* *%:~* *%:h* *%:t* *%:r* *%:e* *%:s* *%:gs*
+*:_%:* *::8* *::p* *::.* *::~* *::h* *::t* *::r* *::e* *::s* *::gs* *::S*
+     *%:8* *%:p* *%:.* *%:~* *%:h* *%:t* *%:r* *%:e* *%:s* *%:gs* *%:S*
 The file name modifiers can be used after "%", "#", "#n", "<cfile>", "<sfile>",
 "<afile>" or "<abuf>".  They are also used with the |fnamemodify()| function.
 These are not available when Vim has been compiled without the |+modify_fname|
@@ -880,6 +880,10 @@ These modifiers can be given, in this order:
 	:gs?pat?sub?
 		Substitute all occurrences of "pat" with "sub".  Otherwise
 		this works like ":s".
+	:S	Escape special characters for use with a shell command (see 
+		|shellescape()|). Must be the last one. Examples: >
+		    :!dir <cfile>:S
+		    :call system('chmod +w -- ' . expand('%:S'))
 
 Examples, when the file name is "src/version.c", current dir
 "/home/mool/vim": >
@@ -1080,6 +1084,9 @@ another window, or drag statuslines of other windows.  You can drag the
 statusline of the command-line window itself and the statusline above it.
 Thus you can resize the command-line window, but not others.
 
+The |getcmdwintype()| function returns the type of the command-line being
+edited as described in |cmdwin-char|.
+
 
 AUTOCOMMANDS
 

runtime/doc/develop.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*develop.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Apr 27
+*develop.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Mar 27
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -19,7 +19,6 @@ code.
 
 Vim is open source software.  Everybody is encouraged to contribute to help
 improving Vim.  For sending patches a context diff "diff -c" is preferred.
-Also see http://www.vim.org/tips/tip.php?tip_id=618.
 Also see http://vim.wikia.com/wiki/How_to_make_and_submit_a_patch.
 
 ==============================================================================

runtime/doc/diff.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*diff.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Sep 20
+*diff.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 May 20
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ While already in Vim you can start diff mode in three ways.
 :difft[his]	Make the current window part of the diff windows.  This sets
 		the options like for "vimdiff".
 
-:diffp[atch] {patchfile}				 *E816* *:diffp* *:diffpatch*
+:diffp[atch] {patchfile}			 *E816* *:diffp* *:diffpatch*
 		Use the current buffer, patch it with the diff found in
 		{patchfile} and open a buffer on the result.  The options are
 		set as for "vimdiff".

runtime/doc/digraph.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*digraph.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Dec 12
+*digraph.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Jun 19
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -170,6 +170,11 @@ used for the currency sign, and latin9 (iso-8859-15), where the digraph =e is
 used for the euro sign, while both of them are the character 164, 0xa4.  For
 compatibility with zsh Eu can also be used for the euro sign.
 
+ROUBLE
+
+The rouble sign was added in 2014 as 0x20bd.  Vim supports the digraphs =R and
+=P for this.  Note that R= and P= are other characters.
+
 							*digraph-table*
 char  digraph	hex	dec	official name ~
 ^@	NU	0x00	  0	NULL (NUL)
@@ -966,6 +971,8 @@ char  digraph	hex	dec	official name ~
 ₧	Pt	20A7	8359	PESETA SIGN
 ₩	W=	20A9	8361	WON SIGN
 €	Eu	20AC	8364	EURO SIGN
+₽	=R	20BD	8381	ROUBLE SIGN
+₽	=P	20BD	8381	ROUBLE SIGN
 ℃	oC	2103	8451	DEGREE CELSIUS
 ℅	co	2105	8453	CARE OF
 ℉	oF	2109	8457	DEGREE FAHRENHEIT
@@ -1077,7 +1084,7 @@ char  digraph	hex	dec	official name ~
 ⊥	-T	22A5	8869	UP TACK
 ⋅	.P	22C5	8901	DOT OPERATOR
 ⋮	:3	22EE	8942	VERTICAL ELLIPSIS
-⋯       .3      22EF    8943    MIDLINE HORIZONTAL ELLIPSIS
+⋯	.3	22EF	8943	MIDLINE HORIZONTAL ELLIPSIS
 ⌂	Eh	2302	8962	HOUSE
 ⌈	<7	2308	8968	LEFT CEILING
 ⌉	>7	2309	8969	RIGHT CEILING

runtime/doc/editing.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*editing.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Nov 25
+*editing.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Aug 09
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -1362,11 +1362,21 @@ cannot be read without the right key.
 {only available when compiled with the |+cryptv| feature}  *E833*
 
 The text in the swap file and the undo file is also encrypted.  *E843*
+However, this is done block-by-block and may reduce the time needed to crack a
+password.  You can disable the swap file, but then a crash will cause you to
+lose your work.  The undo file can be disabled without much disadvantage. >
+	:set noundofile
+	:noswapfile edit secrets
 
 Note: The text in memory is not encrypted.  A system administrator may be able
 to see your text while you are editing it.  When filtering text with
-":!filter" or using ":w !command" the text is not encrypted, this may reveal
-it to others.  The 'viminfo' file is not encrypted.
+":!filter" or using ":w !command" the text is also not encrypted, this may
+reveal it to others.  The 'viminfo' file is not encrypted.
+
+You could do this to edit very secret text: >
+	:set noundofile viminfo=
+	:noswapfile edit secrets.txt
+Keep in mind that without a swap file you risk loosing your work in a crash.
 
 WARNING: If you make a typo when entering the key and then write the file and
 exit, the text will be lost!
@@ -1393,18 +1403,25 @@ To disable the encryption, reset the 'key' option to an empty value: >
 	:set key=
 
 You can use the 'cryptmethod' option to select the type of encryption, use one
-of these two: >
-	:setlocal cm=zip       " weak method, backwards compatible
-	:setlocal cm=blowfish  " strong method
+of these: >
+	:setlocal cm=zip        " weak method, backwards compatible
+	:setlocal cm=blowfish   " method with flaws
+	:setlocal cm=blowfish2  " medium strong method
+
 Do this before writing the file.  When reading an encrypted file it will be
 set automatically to the method used when that file was written.  You can
 change 'cryptmethod' before writing that file to change the method.
+
 To set the default method, used for new files, use one of these in your
 |vimrc| file: >
 	set cm=zip
-	set cm=blowfish
+	set cm=blowfish2
+Use the first one if you need to be compatible with Vim 7.2 and older.  Using
+"blowfish2" is highly recommended if you can use a Vim version that supports
+it.
+
 The message given for reading and writing a file will show "[crypted]" when
-using zip, "[blowfish]" when using blowfish.
+using zip, "[blowfish]" when using blowfish, etc.
 
 When writing an undo file, the same key and method will be used for the text
 in the undo file. |persistent-undo|.
@@ -1439,7 +1456,7 @@ lines to "/etc/magic", "/usr/share/misc/magic" or wherever your system has the
      0	string	VimCrypt~	Vim encrypted file
      >9	string	01	- "zip" cryptmethod
      >9	string	02	- "blowfish" cryptmethod
-
+     >9	string	03	- "blowfish2" cryptmethod
 
 Notes:
 - Encryption is not possible when doing conversion with 'charconvert'.
@@ -1463,20 +1480,25 @@ Notes:
 - Pkzip uses the same encryption as 'cryptmethod' "zip", and US Govt has no
   objection to its export.  Pkzip's public file APPNOTE.TXT describes this
   algorithm in detail.
+- The implmentation of 'cryptmethod' "blowfish" has a flaw.  It is possible to
+  crack the first 64 bytes of a file and in some circumstances more of the
+  file. Use of it is not recommended, but it's still the strongest method
+  supported by Vim 7.3 and 7.4.  The "zip" method is even weaker.
 - Vim originates from the Netherlands.  That is where the sources come from.
   Thus the encryption code is not exported from the USA.
 
 ==============================================================================
 10. Timestamps					*timestamp* *timestamps*
 
-Vim remembers the modification timestamp of a file when you begin editing it.
-This is used to avoid that you have two different versions of the same file
-(without you knowing this).
+Vim remembers the modification timestamp, mode and size of a file when you
+begin editing it.  This is used to avoid that you have two different versions
+of the same file (without you knowing this).
 
-After a shell command is run (|:!cmd| |suspend| |:read!| |K|) timestamps are
-compared for all buffers in a window.   Vim will run any associated
-|FileChangedShell| autocommands or display a warning for any files that have
-changed.  In the GUI this happens when Vim regains input focus.
+After a shell command is run (|:!cmd| |suspend| |:read!| |K|) timestamps,
+file modes and file sizes are compared for all buffers in a window.   Vim will
+run any associated |FileChangedShell| autocommands or display a warning for
+any files that have changed.  In the GUI this happens when Vim regains input
+focus.
 
 							*E321* *E462*
 If you want to automatically reload a file when it has been changed outside of

runtime/doc/eval.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*eval.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Jan 14
+*eval.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Aug 16
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ arguments: >
 
 
 1.3 Lists ~
-							*List* *Lists* *E686*
+						*list* *List* *Lists* *E686*
 A List is an ordered sequence of items.  An item can be of any type.  Items
 can be accessed by their index number.	Items can be added and removed at any
 position in the sequence.
@@ -327,6 +327,7 @@ examples: >
 Changing the order of items in a list: >
 	:call sort(list)		" sort a list alphabetically
 	:call reverse(list)		" reverse the order of items
+	:call uniq(sort(list))		" sort and remove duplicates
 
 
 For loop ~
@@ -393,7 +394,7 @@ example, to add up all the numbers in a list: >
 
 
 1.4 Dictionaries ~
-						*Dictionaries* *Dictionary*
+					*dict* *Dictionaries* *Dictionary*
 A Dictionary is an associative array: Each entry has a key and a value.  The
 entry can be located with the key.  The entries are stored without a specific
 ordering.
@@ -1004,7 +1005,7 @@ function.  Example: >
 
 
 
-string							*expr-string* *E114*
+string						*string* *expr-string* *E114*
 ------
 "string"		string constant		*expr-quote*
 
@@ -1143,7 +1144,7 @@ specified by what is prepended:
 |local-variable|     l:	  Local to a function.
 |script-variable|    s:	  Local to a |:source|'ed Vim script.
 |function-argument|  a:	  Function argument (only inside a function).
-|vim-variable|	     v:	  Global, predefined by Vim.
+|vim-variable|       v:	  Global, predefined by Vim.
 
 The scope name by itself can be used as a |Dictionary|.  For example, to
 delete all script-local variables: >
@@ -1555,6 +1556,16 @@ v:profiling	Normally zero.	Set to one after using ":profile start".
 v:progname	Contains the name (with path removed) with which Vim was
 		invoked.  Allows you to do special initialisations for |view|,
 		|evim| etc., or any other name you might symlink to Vim.
+		Read-only.
+
+					*v:progpath* *progpath-variable*
+v:progpath	Contains the command with which Vim was invoked, including the
+		path.  Useful if you want to message a Vim server using a
+		|--remote-expr|.
+		To get the full path use: >
+			echo exepath(v:progpath)
+<		NOTE: This does not work when the command is a relative path
+		and the current directory has changed.
 		Read-only.
 
 					*v:register* *register-variable*
@@ -1671,7 +1682,7 @@ v:version	Version number of Vim: Major version number times 100 plus
 		is 501.  Read-only.  "version" also works, for backwards
 		compatibility.
 		Use |has()| to check if a certain patch was included, e.g.: >
-			if has("patch123")
+			if has("patch-7.4.123")
 <		Note that patch numbers are specific to the version, thus both
 		version 5.0 and 5.1 may have a patch 123, but these are
 		completely different.
@@ -1705,6 +1716,8 @@ append( {lnum}, {string})	Number	append {string} below line {lnum}
 append( {lnum}, {list})		Number	append lines {list} below line {lnum}
 argc()				Number	number of files in the argument list
 argidx()			Number	current index in the argument list
+arglistid( [{winnr}, [ {tabnr}]])
+				Number	argument list id
 argv( {nr})			String	{nr} entry of the argument list
 argv( )				List	the argument list
 asin( {expr})			Float	arc sine of {expr}
@@ -1745,7 +1758,7 @@ cscope_connection( [{num} , {dbpath} [, {prepend}]])
 cursor( {lnum}, {col} [, {coladd}])
 				Number	move cursor to {lnum}, {col}, {coladd}
 cursor( {list})			Number	move cursor to position in {list}
-deepcopy( {expr})		any	make a full copy of {expr}
+deepcopy( {expr} [, {noref}])	any	make a full copy of {expr}
 delete( {fname})		Number	delete file {fname}
 did_filetype()			Number	TRUE if FileType autocommand event used
 diff_filler( {lnum})		Number	diff filler lines about {lnum}
@@ -1755,6 +1768,7 @@ escape( {string}, {chars})	String	escape {chars} in {string} with '\'
 eval( {string})			any	evaluate {string} into its value
 eventhandler( )			Number	TRUE if inside an event handler
 executable( {expr})		Number	1 if executable {expr} exists
+exepath( {expr})		String  full path of the command {expr}
 exists( {expr})			Number	TRUE if {expr} exists
 extend( {expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}])
 				List/Dict insert items of {expr2} into {expr1}
@@ -1793,11 +1807,13 @@ getchar( [expr])		Number	get one character from the user
 getcharmod( )			Number	modifiers for the last typed character
 getcmdline()			String	return the current command-line
 getcmdpos()			Number	return cursor position in command-line
-getcmdtype()			String	return the current command-line type
+getcmdtype()			String	return current command-line type
+getcmdwintype()			String	return current command-line window type
+getcurpos()			List	position of the cursor
 getcwd()			String	the current working directory
+getfontname( [{name}])		String	name of font being used
 getfperm( {fname})		String	file permissions of file {fname}
 getfsize( {fname})		Number	size in bytes of file {fname}
-getfontname( [{name}])		String	name of font being used
 getftime( {fname})		Number	last modification time of file
 getftype( {fname})		String	description of type of file {fname}
 getline( {lnum})		String	line {lnum} of current buffer
@@ -1807,7 +1823,8 @@ getmatches()			List	list of current matches
 getpid()			Number	process ID of Vim
 getpos( {expr})			List	position of cursor, mark, etc.
 getqflist()			List	list of quickfix items
-getreg( [{regname} [, 1]])	String	contents of register
+getreg( [{regname} [, 1 [, {list}]]])
+				String or List   contents of register
 getregtype( [{regname}])	String	type of register
 gettabvar( {nr}, {varname} [, {def}])
 				any	variable {varname} in tab {nr} or {def}
@@ -1819,7 +1836,7 @@ getwinvar( {nr}, {varname} [, {def}])
 				any	variable {varname} in window {nr}
 glob( {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]])
 				any	expand file wildcards in {expr}
-globpath( {path}, {expr} [, {flag}])
+globpath( {path}, {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]])
 				String	do glob({expr}) for all dirs in {path}
 has( {feature})			Number	TRUE if feature {feature} supported
 has_key( {dict}, {key})		Number	TRUE if {dict} has entry {key}
@@ -1871,6 +1888,8 @@ match( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])
 				Number	position where {pat} matches in {expr}
 matchadd( {group}, {pattern}[, {priority}[, {id}]])
 				Number	highlight {pattern} with {group}
+matchaddpos( {group}, {list}[, {priority}[, {id}]])
+				Number	highlight positions with {group}
 matcharg( {nr})			List	arguments of |:match|
 matchdelete( {id})		Number	delete match identified by {id}
 matchend( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])
@@ -1978,7 +1997,8 @@ strridx( {haystack}, {needle} [, {start}])
 				Number	last index of {needle} in {haystack}
 strtrans( {expr})		String	translate string to make it printable
 strwidth( {expr})		Number	display cell length of the String {expr}
-submatch( {nr})			String	specific match in ":s" or substitute()
+submatch( {nr}[, {list}])	String or List
+					specific match in ":s" or substitute()
 substitute( {expr}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags})
 				String	all {pat} in {expr} replaced with {sub}
 synID( {lnum}, {col}, {trans})	Number	syntax ID at {lnum} and {col}
@@ -1988,6 +2008,7 @@ synIDtrans( {synID})		Number	translated syntax ID of {synID}
 synconcealed( {lnum}, {col})	List    info about concealing
 synstack( {lnum}, {col})	List	stack of syntax IDs at {lnum} and {col}
 system( {expr} [, {input}])	String	output of shell command/filter {expr}
+systemlist( {expr} [, {input}])	List	output of shell command/filter {expr}
 tabpagebuflist( [{arg}])	List	list of buffer numbers in tab page
 tabpagenr( [{arg}])		Number	number of current or last tab page
 tabpagewinnr( {tabarg}[, {arg}])
@@ -2005,6 +2026,8 @@ trunc( {expr})			Float	truncate Float {expr}
 type( {name})			Number	type of variable {name}
 undofile( {name})		String	undo file name for {name}
 undotree()			List	undo file tree
+uniq( {list} [, {func} [, {dict}]])
+				List	remove adjacent duplicates from a list
 values( {dict})			List	values in {dict}
 virtcol( {expr})		Number	screen column of cursor or mark
 visualmode( [expr])		String	last visual mode used
@@ -2086,6 +2109,18 @@ argc()		The result is the number of files in the argument list of the
 argidx()	The result is the current index in the argument list.  0 is
 		the first file.  argc() - 1 is the last one.  See |arglist|.
 
+							*arglistid()*
+arglistid([{winnr}, [ {tabnr} ]])
+		Return the argument list ID.  This is a number which
+		identifies the argument list being used.  Zero is used for the
+		global argument list.  See |arglist|.
+		Return -1 if the arguments are invalid.
+
+		Without arguments use the current window.
+		With {winnr} only use this window in the current tab page.
+		With {winnr} and {tabnr} use the window in the specified tab
+		page.
+
 							*argv()*
 argv([{nr}])	The result is the {nr}th file in the argument list of the
 		current window.  See |arglist|.  "argv(0)" is the first one.
@@ -2570,9 +2605,14 @@ cursor({lnum}, {col} [, {off}])				*cursor()*
 cursor({list})
 		Positions the cursor at the column (byte count) {col} in the
 		line {lnum}.  The first column is one.
+
 		When there is one argument {list} this is used as a |List|
-		with two or three items {lnum}, {col} and {off}.  This is like
-		the return value of |getpos()|, but without the first item.
+		with two, three or four item:
+			[{lnum}, {col}, {off}]
+			[{lnum}, {col}, {off}, {curswant}]
+		This is like the return value of |getpos()| or |getcurpos()|,
+		but without the first item.
+
 		Does not change the jumplist.
 		If {lnum} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer,
 		the cursor will be positioned at the last line in the buffer.
@@ -2581,6 +2621,8 @@ cursor({list})
 		the cursor will be positioned at the last character in the
 		line.
 		If {col} is zero, the cursor will stay in the current column.
+		If {curswant} is given it is used to set the preferred column
+		for vertical movment.  Otherwise {col} is used.
 		When 'virtualedit' is used {off} specifies the offset in
 		screen columns from the start of the character.  E.g., a
 		position within a <Tab> or after the last character.
@@ -2697,6 +2739,15 @@ executable({expr})					*executable()*
 			0	does not exist
 			-1	not implemented on this system
 
+exepath({expr})						*exepath()*
+		If {expr} is an executable and is either an absolute path, a
+		relative path or found in $PATH, return the full path.
+		Note that the current directory is used when {expr} starts
+		with "./", which may be a problem for Vim: >
+			echo exepath(v:progpath)
+<		If {expr} cannot be found in $PATH or is not executable then
+		an empty string is returned.
+
 							*exists()*
 exists({expr})	The result is a Number, which is non-zero if {expr} is
 		defined, zero otherwise.  The {expr} argument is a string,
@@ -2709,7 +2760,8 @@ exists({expr})	The result is a Number, which is non-zero if {expr} is
 					string)
 			*funcname	built-in function (see |functions|)
 					or user defined function (see
-					|user-functions|).
+					|user-functions|). Also works for a
+					variable that is a Funcref.
 			varname		internal variable (see
 					|internal-variables|).	Also works
 					for |curly-braces-names|, |Dictionary|
@@ -2815,7 +2867,7 @@ expand({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]])				*expand()*
 			<afile>		autocmd file name
 			<abuf>		autocmd buffer number (as a String!)
 			<amatch>	autocmd matched name
-			<sfile>		sourced script file name
+			<sfile>		sourced script file or function name
 			<slnum>		sourced script file line number
 			<cword>		word under the cursor
 			<cWORD>		WORD under the cursor
@@ -3211,6 +3263,10 @@ getchar([expr])						*getchar()*
 		String when a modifier (shift, control, alt) was used that is
 		not included in the character.
 
+		When [expr] is 0 and Esc is typed, there will be a short delay
+		while Vim waits to see if this is the start of an escape
+		sequence.
+
 		When [expr] is 1 only the first byte is returned.  For a
 		one-byte character it is the character itself as a number.
 		Use nr2char() to convert it to a String.
@@ -3294,6 +3350,22 @@ getcmdtype()						*getcmdtype()*
 		Returns an empty string otherwise.
 		Also see |getcmdpos()|, |setcmdpos()| and |getcmdline()|.
 
+getcmdwintype()						*getcmdwintype()*
+		Return the current |command-line-window| type. Possible return
+		values are the same as |getcmdtype()|. Returns an empty string
+		when not in the command-line window.
+
+							*getcurpos()*
+getcurpos()	Get the position of the cursor.  This is like getpos('.'), but
+		includes an extra item in the list:
+		    [bufnum, lnum, col, off, curswant]
+		The "curswant" number is the preferred column when moving the
+		cursor vertically.
+		This can be used to save and restore the cursor position: >
+			let save_cursor = getcurpos()
+			MoveTheCursorAround
+			call setpos('.', save_cursor)
+<
 							*getcwd()*
 getcwd()	The result is a String, which is the name of the current
 		working directory.
@@ -3415,6 +3487,34 @@ getmatches()						*getmatches()*
 			'pattern': 'FIXME', 'priority': 10, 'id': 2}] >
 			:unlet m
 <
+							*getpid()*
+getpid()	Return a Number which is the process ID of the Vim process.
+		On Unix and MS-Windows this is a unique number, until Vim
+		exits.	On MS-DOS it's always zero.
+
+							*getpos()*
+getpos({expr})	Get the position for {expr}.  For possible values of {expr}
+		see |line()|.  For getting the cursor position see
+		|getcurpos()|.
+		The result is a |List| with four numbers:
+		    [bufnum, lnum, col, off]
+		"bufnum" is zero, unless a mark like '0 or 'A is used, then it
+		is the buffer number of the mark.
+		"lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer.  The first
+		column is 1.
+		The "off" number is zero, unless 'virtualedit' is used.  Then
+		it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the
+		character.  E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last
+		character.
+		Note that for '< and '> Visual mode matters: when it is "V"
+		(visual line mode) the column of '< is zero and the column of
+		'> is a large number.
+		This can be used to save and restore the position of a mark: >
+			let save_a_mark = getpos("'a")
+			...
+			call setpos(''a', save_a_mark
+<		Also see |getcurpos()| and |setpos()|.
+
 
 getqflist()						*getqflist()*
 		Returns a list with all the current quickfix errors.  Each
@@ -3443,7 +3543,7 @@ getqflist()						*getqflist()*
 			:endfor
 
 
-getreg([{regname} [, 1]])				*getreg()*
+getreg([{regname} [, 1 [, {list}]]])			*getreg()*
 		The result is a String, which is the contents of register
 		{regname}.  Example: >
 			:let cliptext = getreg('*')
@@ -3452,6 +3552,11 @@ getreg([{regname} [, 1]])				*getreg()*
 		getreg('=', 1) returns the expression itself, so that it can
 		be restored with |setreg()|.  For other registers the extra
 		argument is ignored, thus you can always give it.
+		If {list} is present and non-zero result type is changed to 
+		|List|. Each list item is one text line. Use it if you care
+		about zero bytes possibly present inside register: without
+		third argument both NLs and zero bytes are represented as NLs
+		(see |NL-used-for-Nul|).
 		If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used.
 
 
@@ -3539,11 +3644,12 @@ glob({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]])				*glob()*
 		See |expand()| for expanding special Vim variables.  See
 		|system()| for getting the raw output of an external command.
 
-globpath({path}, {expr} [, {flag}])			*globpath()*
+globpath({path}, {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]])			*globpath()*
 		Perform glob() on all directories in {path} and concatenate
 		the results.  Example: >
 			:echo globpath(&rtp, "syntax/c.vim")
-<		{path} is a comma-separated list of directory names.  Each
+<
+		{path} is a comma-separated list of directory names.  Each
 		directory name is prepended to {expr} and expanded like with
 		|glob()|.  A path separator is inserted when needed.
 		To add a comma inside a directory name escape it with a
@@ -3551,11 +3657,19 @@ globpath({path}, {expr} [, {flag}])			*globpath()*
 		trailing backslash, remove it if you put a comma after it.
 		If the expansion fails for one of the directories, there is no
 		error message.
-		Unless the optional {flag} argument is given and is non-zero,
+
+		Unless the optional {nosuf} argument is given and is non-zero,
 		the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching
 		one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and
 		'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches.
 
+		When {list} is present and it is non-zero the result is a List
+		with all matching files. The advantage of using a List is, you
+		also get filenames containing newlines correctly. Otherwise
+		the result is a String and when there are several matches,
+		they are separated by <NL> characters.  Example: >
+			:echo globpath(&rtp, "syntax/c.vim", 0, 1)
+<
 		The "**" item can be used to search in a directory tree.
 		For example, to find all "README.txt" files in the directories
 		in 'runtimepath' and below: >
@@ -4274,6 +4388,41 @@ matchadd({group}, {pattern}[, {priority}[, {id}]])
 		available from |getmatches()|.	All matches can be deleted in
 		one operation by |clearmatches()|.
 
+matchaddpos({group}, {pos}[, {priority}[, {id}]])		*matchaddpos()*
+		Same as |matchadd()|, but requires a list of positions {pos}
+		instead of a pattern. This command is faster than |matchadd()|
+		because it does not require to handle regular expressions and
+		sets buffer line boundaries to redraw screen. It is supposed
+		to be used when fast match additions and deletions are
+		required, for example to highlight matching parentheses.
+
+		The list {pos} can contain one of these items:
+		- A number.  This whole line will be highlighted.  The first
+		  line has number 1.
+		- A list with one number, e.g., [23]. The whole line with this
+		  number will be highlighted.
+		- A list with two numbers, e.g., [23, 11]. The first number is
+		  the line number, the second one is the column number (first
+		  column is 1, the value must correspond to the byte index as
+		  |col()| would return).  The character at this position will
+		  be highlighted.
+		- A list with three numbers, e.g., [23, 11, 3]. As above, but
+		  the third number gives the length of the highlight in bytes.
+		
+		The maximum number of positions is 8.
+
+		Example: >
+			:highlight MyGroup ctermbg=green guibg=green
+			:let m = matchaddpos("MyGroup", [[23, 24], 34])
+<		Deletion of the pattern: >
+			:call matchdelete(m)
+
+<		Matches added by |matchaddpos()| are returned by
+		|getmatches()| with an entry "pos1", "pos2", etc., with the
+		value a list like the {pos} item.
+		These matches cannot be set via |setmatches()|, however they
+		can still be deleted by |clearmatches()|.
+
 matcharg({nr})							*matcharg()*
 		Selects the {nr} match item, as set with a |:match|,
 		|:2match| or |:3match| command.
@@ -4432,33 +4581,6 @@ nr2char({expr}[, {utf8}])				*nr2char()*
 		characters.  nr2char(0) is a real NUL and terminates the
 		string, thus results in an empty string.
 
-							*getpid()*
-getpid()	Return a Number which is the process ID of the Vim process.
-		On Unix and MS-Windows this is a unique number, until Vim
-		exits.	On MS-DOS it's always zero.
-
-							*getpos()*
-getpos({expr})	Get the position for {expr}.  For possible values of {expr}
-		see |line()|.
-		The result is a |List| with four numbers:
-		    [bufnum, lnum, col, off]
-		"bufnum" is zero, unless a mark like '0 or 'A is used, then it
-		is the buffer number of the mark.
-		"lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer.  The first
-		column is 1.
-		The "off" number is zero, unless 'virtualedit' is used.  Then
-		it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the
-		character.  E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last
-		character.
-		Note that for '< and '> Visual mode matters: when it is "V"
-		(visual line mode) the column of '< is zero and the column of
-		'> is a large number.
-		This can be used to save and restore the cursor position: >
-			let save_cursor = getpos(".")
-			MoveTheCursorAround
-			call setpos('.', save_cursor)
-<		Also see |setpos()|.
-
 or({expr}, {expr})					*or()*
 		Bitwise OR on the two arguments.  The arguments are converted
 		to a number.  A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error.
@@ -5257,8 +5379,9 @@ setpos({expr}, {list})
 			.	the cursor
 			'x	mark x
 
-		{list} must be a |List| with four numbers:
+		{list} must be a |List| with four or five numbers:
 		    [bufnum, lnum, col, off]
+		    [bufnum, lnum, col, off, curswant]
 
 		"bufnum" is the buffer number.	Zero can be used for the
 		current buffer.  Setting the cursor is only possible for
@@ -5276,6 +5399,12 @@ setpos({expr}, {list})
 		character.  E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last
 		character.
 
+		The "curswant" number is only used when setting the cursor
+		position.  It sets the preferred column for when moving the
+		cursor vertically.  When the "curswant" number is missing the
+		preferred column is not set.  When it is present and setting a
+		mark position it is not used.
+
 		Note that for '< and '> changing the line number may result in
 		the marks to be effectively be swapped, so that '< is always
 		before '>.
@@ -5283,10 +5412,13 @@ setpos({expr}, {list})
 		Returns 0 when the position could be set, -1 otherwise.
 		An error message is given if {expr} is invalid.
 
-		Also see |getpos()|
+		Also see |getpos()| and |getcurpos()|.
 
 		This does not restore the preferred column for moving
-		vertically.  See |winrestview()| for that.
+		vertically; if you set the cursor position with this, |j| and
+		|k| motions will jump to previous columns!  Use |cursor()| to
+		also set the preferred column.  Also see the "curswant" key in
+		|winrestview()|.
 
 
 setqflist({list} [, {action}])				*setqflist()*
@@ -5338,6 +5470,8 @@ setqflist({list} [, {action}])				*setqflist()*
 							*setreg()*
 setreg({regname}, {value} [,{options}])
 		Set the register {regname} to {value}.
+		{value} may be any value returned by |getreg()|, including 
+		a |List|.
 		If {options} contains "a" or {regname} is upper case,
 		then the value is appended.
 		{options} can also contain a register type specification:
@@ -5350,10 +5484,15 @@ setreg({regname}, {value} [,{options}])
 		in the longest line (counting a <Tab> as 1 character).
 
 		If {options} contains no register settings, then the default
-		is to use character mode unless {value} ends in a <NL>.
-		Setting the '=' register is not possible, but you can use >
-			:let @= = var_expr
-<		Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure.
+		is to use character mode unless {value} ends in a <NL> for 
+		string {value} and linewise mode for list {value}. Blockwise 
+		mode is never selected automatically.
+		Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure.
+
+							*E883*
+		Note: you may not use |List| containing more then one item to 
+		      set search and expression registers. Lists containing no 
+		      items act like empty strings.
 
 		Examples: >
 			:call setreg(v:register, @*)
@@ -5361,8 +5500,11 @@ setreg({regname}, {value} [,{options}])
 			:call setreg('a', "1\n2\n3", 'b5')
 
 <		This example shows using the functions to save and restore a
-		register. >
-			:let var_a = getreg('a', 1)
+		register (note: you may not reliably restore register value 
+		without using the third argument to |getreg()| as without it 
+		newlines are represented as newlines AND Nul bytes are 
+		represented as newlines as well, see |NL-used-for-Nul|). >
+			:let var_a = getreg('a', 1, 1)
 			:let var_amode = getregtype('a')
 			    ....
 			:call setreg('a', var_a, var_amode)
@@ -5428,6 +5570,7 @@ shellescape({string} [, {special}])			*shellescape()*
 <		This results in a directory listing for the file under the
 		cursor.  Example of use with |system()|: >
 		    :call system("chmod +w -- " . shellescape(expand("%")))
+<		See also |::S|.
 
 
 shiftwidth()						*shiftwidth()*
@@ -5487,20 +5630,40 @@ sinh({expr})						*sinh()*
 
 
 sort({list} [, {func} [, {dict}]])			*sort()* *E702*
-		Sort the items in {list} in-place.  Returns {list}.  If you
-		want a list to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
+		Sort the items in {list} in-place.  Returns {list}.
+		
+		If you want a list to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
 			:let sortedlist = sort(copy(mylist))
-<		Uses the string representation of each item to sort on.
-		Numbers sort after Strings, |Lists| after Numbers.
-		For sorting text in the current buffer use |:sort|.
-		When {func} is given and it is one then case is ignored.
-		{dict} is for functions with the "dict" attribute.  It will be
-		used to set the local variable "self". |Dictionary-function|
+
+<		When {func} is omitted, is empty or zero, then sort() uses the
+		string representation of each item to sort on.  Numbers sort
+		after Strings, |Lists| after Numbers.  For sorting text in the
+		current buffer use |:sort|.
+
+		When {func} is given and it is is '1' or 'i' then case is
+		ignored.
+		
+		When {func} is given and it is 'n' then all items will be
+		sorted numerical (Implementation detail: This uses the
+		strtod() function to parse numbers, Strings, Lists, Dicts and
+		Funcrefs will be considered as being 0).
+
 		When {func} is a |Funcref| or a function name, this function
 		is called to compare items.  The function is invoked with two
 		items as argument and must return zero if they are equal, 1 or
 		bigger if the first one sorts after the second one, -1 or
 		smaller if the first one sorts before the second one.
+
+		{dict} is for functions with the "dict" attribute.  It will be
+		used to set the local variable "self". |Dictionary-function|
+
+		The sort is stable, items which compare equal (as number or as
+		string) will keep their relative position. E.g., when sorting
+		on numbers, text strings will sort next to each other, in the
+		same order as they were originally.
+
+		Also see |uniq()|.
+
 		Example: >
 			func MyCompare(i1, i2)
 			   return a:i1 == a:i2 ? 0 : a:i1 > a:i2 ? 1 : -1
@@ -5642,7 +5805,7 @@ strchars({expr})					*strchars()*
 
 strdisplaywidth({expr}[, {col}])			*strdisplaywidth()*
 		The result is a Number, which is the number of display cells
-		String {expr} occupies on the screen.
+		String {expr} occupies on the screen when it starts a {col}.
 		When {col} is omitted zero is used.  Otherwise it is the
 		screen column where to start.  This matters for Tab
 		characters.
@@ -5767,12 +5930,23 @@ strwidth({expr})					*strwidth()*
 		Ambiguous, this function's return value depends on 'ambiwidth'.
 		Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strchars()|.
 
-submatch({nr})						*submatch()*
+submatch({nr}[, {list}])				*submatch()*
 		Only for an expression in a |:substitute| command or
 		substitute() function.
 		Returns the {nr}'th submatch of the matched text.  When {nr}
 		is 0 the whole matched text is returned.
+		Note that a NL in the string can stand for a line break of a
+		multi-line match or a NUL character in the text.
 		Also see |sub-replace-expression|.
+
+		If {list} is present and non-zero then submatch() returns 
+		a list of strings, similar to |getline()| with two arguments. 
+		NL characters in the text represent NUL characters in the
+		text.
+		Only returns more than one item for |:substitute|, inside
+		|substitute()| this list will always contain one or zero
+		items, since there are no real line breaks.
+
 		Example: >
 			:s/\d\+/\=submatch(0) + 1/
 <		This finds the first number in the line and adds one to it.
@@ -5905,19 +6079,29 @@ synstack({lnum}, {col})					*synstack()*
 		valid positions.
 
 system({expr} [, {input}])				*system()* *E677*
-		Get the output of the shell command {expr}.
-		When {input} is given, this string is written to a file and
-		passed as stdin to the command.  The string is written as-is,
-		you need to take care of using the correct line separators
-		yourself.  Pipes are not used.
-		Note: Use |shellescape()| to escape special characters in a
-		command argument.  Newlines in {expr} may cause the command to
-		fail.  The characters in 'shellquote' and 'shellxquote' may
-		also cause trouble.
+		Get the output of the shell command {expr} as a string.  See
+		|systemlist()| to get the output as a List.
+
+		When {input} is given and is a string this string is written 
+		to a file and passed as stdin to the command.  The string is 
+		written as-is, you need to take care of using the correct line 
+		separators yourself.
+		If {input} is given and is a |List| it is written to the file
+		in a way |writefile()| does with {binary} set to "b" (i.e.
+		with a newline between each list item with newlines inside
+		list items converted to NULs).  
+		Pipes are not used.
+
+		Note: Use |shellescape()| or |::S| with |expand()| or 
+		|fnamemodify()| to escape special characters in a command 
+		argument.  Newlines in {expr} may cause the command to fail.  
+		The characters in 'shellquote' and 'shellxquote' may also 
+		cause trouble.
 		This is not to be used for interactive commands.
 
 		The result is a String.  Example: >
 		    :let files = system("ls " .  shellescape(expand('%:h')))
+		    :let files = system('ls ' . expand('%:h:S'))
 
 <		To make the result more system-independent, the shell output
 		is filtered to replace <CR> with <NL> for Macintosh, and
@@ -5944,6 +6128,16 @@ system({expr} [, {input}])				*system()* *E677*
 		Use |:checktime| to force a check.
 
 
+systemlist({expr} [, {input}])				*systemlist()*
+		Same as |system()|, but returns a |List| with lines (parts of 
+		output separated by NL) with NULs transformed into NLs. Output 
+		is the same as |readfile()| will output with {binary} argument 
+		set to "b".
+
+		Returns an empty string on error, so be careful not to run 
+		into |E706|.
+
+
 tabpagebuflist([{arg}])					*tabpagebuflist()*
 		The result is a |List|, where each item is the number of the
 		buffer associated with each window in the current tab page.
@@ -5966,7 +6160,7 @@ tabpagenr([{arg}])					*tabpagenr()*
 		The number can be used with the |:tab| command.
 
 
-tabpagewinnr({tabarg}, [{arg}])				*tabpagewinnr()*
+tabpagewinnr({tabarg} [, {arg}])			*tabpagewinnr()*
 		Like |winnr()| but for tab page {tabarg}.
 		{tabarg} specifies the number of tab page to be used.
 		{arg} is used like with |winnr()|:
@@ -6166,6 +6360,14 @@ undotree()						*undotree()*
 				blocks.  Each item may again have an "alt"
 				item.
 
+uniq({list} [, {func} [, {dict}]])			*uniq()* *E882*
+		Remove second and succeeding copies of repeated adjacent
+		{list} items in-place.  Returns {list}.  If you want a list
+		to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
+			:let newlist = uniq(copy(mylist))
+<		The default compare function uses the string representation of
+		each item.  For the use of {func} and {dict} see |sort()|.
+
 values({dict})						*values()*
 		Return a |List| with all the values of {dict}.	The |List| is
 		in arbitrary order.
@@ -6295,6 +6497,16 @@ winrestcmd()	Returns a sequence of |:resize| commands that should restore
 winrestview({dict})
 		Uses the |Dictionary| returned by |winsaveview()| to restore
 		the view of the current window.
+		Note: The {dict} does not have to contain all values, that are
+		returned by |winsaveview()|. If values are missing, those
+		settings won't be restored. So you can use: >
+		    :call winrestview({'curswant': 4})
+<
+		This will only set the curswant value (the column the cursor
+		wants to move on vertical movements) of the cursor to column 5
+		(yes, that is 5), while all other settings will remain the
+		same. This is useful, if you set the cursor position manually.
+
 		If you have changed the values the result is unpredictable.
 		If the window size changed the result won't be the same.
 
@@ -6306,10 +6518,12 @@ winsaveview()	Returns a |Dictionary| that contains information to restore
 		buffer and you want to go back to the original view.
 		This does not save fold information.  Use the 'foldenable'
 		option to temporarily switch off folding, so that folds are
-		not opened when moving around.
+		not opened when moving around. This may have side effects.
 		The return value includes:
 			lnum		cursor line number
-			col		cursor column
+			col		cursor column (Note: the first column
+					zero, as opposed to what getpos()
+					returns)
 			coladd		cursor column offset for 'virtualedit'
 			curswant	column for vertical movement
 			topline		first line in the window
@@ -6360,7 +6574,7 @@ xor({expr}, {expr})					*xor()*
 
 
 							*feature-list*
-There are three types of features:
+There are four types of features:
 1.  Features that are only supported when they have been enabled when Vim
     was compiled |+feature-list|.  Example: >
 	:if has("cindent")
@@ -6368,11 +6582,21 @@ There are three types of features:
     Example: >
 	:if has("gui_running")
 <							*has-patch*
-3.  Included patches.  First check |v:version| for the version of Vim.
-    Then the "patch123" feature means that patch 123 has been included for
-    this version.  Example (checking version 6.2.148 or later): >
+3.  Included patches.  The "patch123" feature means that patch 123 has been
+    included.  Note that this form does not check the version of Vim, you need
+    to inspect |v:version| for that.
+    Example (checking version 6.2.148 or later): >
 	:if v:version > 602 || v:version == 602 && has("patch148")
-<   Note that it's possible for patch 147 to be omitted even though 148 is
+<    Note that it's possible for patch 147 to be omitted even though 148 is
+    included.
+
+4.  Beyond a certain version or at a certain version and including a specific
+    patch.  The "patch-7.4.237" feature means that the Vim version is 7.5 or
+    later, or it is version 7.4 and patch 237 was included.
+    Note that this only works for patch 7.4.237 and later, before that you
+    need to use the example above that checks v:version.  Example: >
+	:if has("patch-7.4.248")
+<    Note that it's possible for patch 147 to be omitted even though 148 is
     included.
 
 acl			Compiled with |ACL| support.
@@ -6404,6 +6628,7 @@ dialog_con		Compiled with console dialog support.
 dialog_gui		Compiled with GUI dialog support.
 diff			Compiled with |vimdiff| and 'diff' support.
 digraphs		Compiled with support for digraphs.
+directx			Compiled with support for Direct-X and 'renderoptions'.
 dnd			Compiled with support for the "~ register |quote_~|.
 dos16			16 bits DOS version of Vim.
 dos32			32 bits DOS (DJGPP) version of Vim.
@@ -6446,8 +6671,8 @@ jumplist		Compiled with |jumplist| support.
 keymap			Compiled with 'keymap' support.
 langmap			Compiled with 'langmap' support.
 libcall			Compiled with |libcall()| support.
-linebreak		Compiled with 'linebreak', 'breakat' and 'showbreak'
-			support.
+linebreak		Compiled with 'linebreak', 'breakat', 'showbreak' and
+			'breakindent' support.
 lispindent		Compiled with support for lisp indenting.
 listcmds		Compiled with commands for the buffer list |:files|
 			and the argument list |arglist|.
@@ -6594,6 +6819,8 @@ can only be called from within the script and from functions, user commands
 and autocommands defined in the script.  It is also possible to call the
 function from a mapping defined in the script, but then |<SID>| must be used
 instead of "s:" when the mapping is expanded outside of the script.
+There are only script-local functions, no buffer-local or window-local
+functions.
 
 					*:fu* *:function* *E128* *E129* *E123*
 :fu[nction]		List all functions and their arguments.
@@ -6617,11 +6844,15 @@ last defined. Example: >
 <
 See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.
 
-							*E124* *E125* *E853*
+						*E124* *E125* *E853* *E884*
 :fu[nction][!] {name}([arguments]) [range] [abort] [dict]
 			Define a new function by the name {name}.  The name
 			must be made of alphanumeric characters and '_', and
-			must start with a capital or "s:" (see above).
+			must start with a capital or "s:" (see above).  Note
+			that using "b:" or "g:" is not allowed. (since patch
+			7.4.260 E884 is given if the function name has a colon
+			in the name, e.g. for "foo:bar()".  Before that patch
+			no error was given).
 
 			{name} can also be a |Dictionary| entry that is a
 			|Funcref|: >
@@ -7314,6 +7545,8 @@ This does NOT work: >
 			{pattern}, so long as it does not have a special
 			meaning (e.g., '|' or '"') and doesn't occur inside
 			{pattern}.
+			Information about the exception is available in
+			|v:exception|.  Also see |throw-variables|.
 			NOTE: It is not reliable to ":catch" the TEXT of
 			an error message because it may vary in different
 			locales.
@@ -7457,13 +7690,22 @@ This does NOT work: >
 			for Vim commands, |shellescape()| for |:!| commands.
 			Examples: >
 		:execute "e " . fnameescape(filename)
-		:execute "!ls " . shellescape(expand('%:h'), 1)
+		:execute "!ls " . shellescape(filename, 1)
 <
 			Note: The executed string may be any command-line, but
-			you cannot start or end a "while", "for" or "if"
-			command.  Thus this is illegal: >
-		:execute 'while i > 5'
-		:execute 'echo "test" | break'
+			starting or ending "if", "while" and "for" does not
+			always work, because when commands are skipped the
+			":execute" is not evaluated and Vim loses track of
+			where blocks start and end.  Also "break" and
+			"continue" should not be inside ":execute".
+			This example does not work, because the ":execute" is
+			not evaluated and Vim does not see the "while", and
+			gives an error for finding an ":endwhile": >
+		:if 0
+		: execute 'while i > 5'
+		:  echo "test"
+		: endwhile
+		:endif
 <
 			It is allowed to have a "while" or "if" command
 			completely in the executed string: >

runtime/doc/gui.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui.txt*       For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Jun 12
+*gui.txt*       For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Mar 08
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -133,6 +133,7 @@ task bar with the 'guiheadroom' option.
 :winp[os]
 		Display current position of the top left corner of the GUI vim
 		window in pixels.  Does not work in all versions.
+		Also see |getwinposx()| and |getwinposy()|.
 
 :winp[os] {X} {Y}							*E466*
 		Put the GUI vim window at the given {X} and {Y} coordinates.
@@ -151,8 +152,11 @@ task bar with the 'guiheadroom' option.
 		option.
 
 If you are running the X Window System, you can get information about the
-window Vim is running in with this command: >
+window Vim is running in with these commands: >
 	:!xwininfo -id $WINDOWID
+	:!xprop -id $WINDOWID
+	:execute '!xwininfo -id ' . v:windowid
+	:execute '!xprop -id ' . v:windowid
 <
 							*gui-IME* *iBus*
 Input methods for international characters in X that rely on the XIM

runtime/doc/gui_x11.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui_x11.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2011 Sep 14
+*gui_x11.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Mar 08
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -442,7 +442,7 @@ command line argument).
 							*gui-x11-kde*
 There is no KDE version of Vim.  There has been some work on a port using the
 Qt toolkit, but it never worked properly and it has been abandoned.  Work
-continues on Yzis: www.yzis.org.
+continues on Yzis: https://github.com/chrizel/Yzis.
 
 ==============================================================================
 8. Compiling						*gui-x11-compiling*

runtime/doc/if_pyth.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_pyth.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Jul 10
+*if_pyth.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Jul 23
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Paul Moore
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ Both can be available at the same time, but read |python-2-and-3|.
 ==============================================================================
 1. Commands						*python-commands*
 
-					*:python* *:py* *E205* *E263* *E264*
+					*:python* *:py* *E263* *E264* *E887*
 :[range]py[thon] {stmt}
 			Execute Python statement {stmt}.  A simple check if
 			the `:python` command is working: >

runtime/doc/indent.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*indent.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Nov 05
+*indent.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Apr 23
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -686,7 +686,7 @@ two spaces relative to the opening paren:
 	  baz)
 <
 Setting this option changes this behavior so that all subforms are aligned to
-the same column:
+the same column, emulating the default behavior of clojure-mode.el:
 >
 	(foo
 	 bar
@@ -698,7 +698,6 @@ This option is off by default.
 	let g:clojure_align_subforms = 0
 <
 
-
 FORTRAN							*ft-fortran-indent*
 
 Block if, select case, where, and forall constructs are indented.  So are
@@ -813,7 +812,7 @@ OPTIONS: ~
 PHP indenting can be altered in several ways by modifying the values of some
 global variables:
 
-								*php-comment*
+					*php-comment* *PHP_autoformatcomment*
 To not enable auto-formating of comments by default (if you want to use your
 own 'formatoptions'): >
     :let g:PHP_autoformatcomment = 0
@@ -822,6 +821,7 @@ Else, 't' will be removed from the 'formatoptions' string and "qrowcb" will be
 added, see |fo-table| for more information.
 -------------
 
+							*PHP_outdentSLComments*
 To add extra indentation to single-line comments: >
     :let g:PHP_outdentSLComments = N
 
@@ -833,6 +833,7 @@ Only single-line comments will be affected such as: >
     /* Comment */
 -------------
 
+							*PHP_default_indenting*
 To add extra indentation to every PHP lines with N being the number of
 'shiftwidth' to add: >
     :let g:PHP_default_indenting = N
@@ -852,14 +853,18 @@ For example, with N = 1, this will give:
 (Notice the extra indentation between the PHP container markers and the code)
 -------------
 
-To indent PHP tags as the surrounding code: >
-    :let g:PHP_outdentphpescape = 0
+							*PHP_outdentphpescape*
+To indent PHP escape tags as the surrounding non-PHP code (only affects the
+PHP escape tags): >
+:let g:PHP_outdentphpescape = 0
 -------------
 
+							*PHP_removeCRwhenUnix*
 To automatically remove '\r' characters when the 'fileformat' is set to Unix: >
     :let g:PHP_removeCRwhenUnix = 1
 -------------
 
+							*PHP_BracesAtCodeLevel*
 To indent braces at the same level than the code they contain: >
     :let g:PHP_BracesAtCodeLevel = 1
     
@@ -878,6 +883,7 @@ NOTE:	Indenting will be a bit slower if this option is used because some
 	optimizations won't be available.
 -------------
 
+							*PHP_vintage_case_default_indent*
 To indent 'case:' and 'default:' statements in switch() blocks: >
     :let g:PHP_vintage_case_default_indent = 1
 

runtime/doc/index.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Nov 14
+*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Mar 25
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -1124,8 +1124,8 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:cNfile|	:cNf[ile]	go to last error in previous file
 |:cabbrev|	:ca[bbrev]	like ":abbreviate" but for Command-line mode
 |:cabclear|	:cabc[lear]	clear all abbreviations for Command-line mode
-|:caddbuffer|	:caddb[uffer]	add errors from buffer
-|:caddexpr|	:cad[dexpr]	add errors from expr
+|:caddbuffer|	:cad[dbuffer]	add errors from buffer
+|:caddexpr|	:cadde[xpr]	add errors from expr
 |:caddfile|	:caddf[ile]	add error message to current quickfix list
 |:call|		:cal[l]		call a function
 |:catch|	:cat[ch]	part of a :try command
@@ -1361,13 +1361,14 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:nmenu|	:nme[nu]	add menu for Normal mode
 |:nnoremap|	:nn[oremap]	like ":noremap" but for Normal mode
 |:nnoremenu|	:nnoreme[nu]	like ":noremenu" but for Normal mode
-|:noautocmd|	:noa[utocmd]	following command don't trigger autocommands
+|:noautocmd|	:noa[utocmd]	following commands don't trigger autocommands
 |:noremap|	:no[remap]	enter a mapping that will not be remapped
 |:nohlsearch|	:noh[lsearch]	suspend 'hlsearch' highlighting
 |:noreabbrev|	:norea[bbrev]	enter an abbreviation that will not be
 				remapped
 |:noremenu|	:noreme[nu]	enter a menu that will not be remapped
 |:normal|	:norm[al]	execute Normal mode commands
+|:noswapfile|	:nos[wapfile]	following commands don't create a swap file
 |:number|	:nu[mber]	print lines with line number
 |:nunmap|	:nun[map]	like ":unmap" but for Normal mode
 |:nunmenu|	:nunme[nu]	remove menu for Normal mode

runtime/doc/insert.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*insert.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Jul 12
+*insert.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Aug 04
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -51,6 +51,8 @@ char		action	~
 		abbreviation.
 		Note: If your <Esc> key is hard to hit on your keyboard, train
 		yourself to use CTRL-[.
+		If Esc doesn't work and you are using a Mac, try CTRL-Esc.
+		Or disable Listening under Accessibility preferences.
 						*i_CTRL-C*
 CTRL-C		Quit insert mode, go back to Normal mode.  Do not check for
 		abbreviations.  Does not trigger the |InsertLeave| autocommand
@@ -1302,7 +1304,7 @@ HTML							*ft-html-omni*
 XHTML							*ft-xhtml-omni*
 
 CTRL-X CTRL-O provides completion of various elements of (X)HTML files.  It is
-designed to support writing of XHTML 1.0 Strict files but will also works for
+designed to support writing of XHTML 1.0 Strict files but will also work for
 other versions of HTML. Features:
 
 - after "<" complete tag name depending on context (no div suggestion inside

runtime/doc/intro.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*intro.txt*     For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Jun 17
+*intro.txt*     For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 May 24
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -136,9 +136,10 @@ http://www.vim.org/maillist.php
 Bug reports:				*bugs* *bug-reports* *bugreport.vim*
 
 Send bug reports to: Vim Developers <vim_dev@vim.org>
-This is a maillist, many people will see the message.  If you don't want that,
-e.g. because it is a security issue, send it to <bugs@vim.org>, this only goes
-to the Vim maintainer (that's Bram).
+This is a maillist, you need to become a member first and many people will see
+the message.  If you don't want that, e.g. because it is a security issue,
+send it to <bugs@vim.org>, this only goes to the Vim maintainer (that's Bram).
+
 Please be brief; all the time that is spent on answering mail is subtracted
 from the time that is spent on improving Vim!  Always give a reproducible
 example and try to find out which settings or other things influence the

runtime/doc/map.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*map.txt*       For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Aug 22
+*map.txt*       For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Jun 02
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -60,17 +60,17 @@ modes.
 			{rhs}, is then further scanned for mappings.  This
 			allows for nested and recursive use of mappings.
 
-
-:no[remap]  {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-nvo|		*:no*  *:noremap*
-:nn[oremap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-n|		*:nn*  *:nnoremap*
-:vn[oremap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-v|		*:vn*  *:vnoremap*
-:xn[oremap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-x|		*:xn*  *:xnoremap*
-:snor[emap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-s|		*:snor* *:snoremap*
-:ono[remap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-o|		*:ono* *:onoremap*
-:no[remap]! {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-ic|		*:no!* *:noremap!*
-:ino[remap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-i|		*:ino* *:inoremap*
-:ln[oremap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-l|		*:ln*  *:lnoremap*
-:cno[remap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-c|		*:cno* *:cnoremap*
+						*:nore* *:norem*
+:no[remap]  {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-nvo|	*:no*  *:noremap* *:nor*
+:nn[oremap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-n|	*:nn*  *:nnoremap*
+:vn[oremap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-v|	*:vn*  *:vnoremap*
+:xn[oremap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-x|	*:xn*  *:xnoremap*
+:snor[emap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-s|	*:snor* *:snoremap*
+:ono[remap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-o|	*:ono* *:onoremap*
+:no[remap]! {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-ic|	*:no!* *:noremap!*
+:ino[remap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-i|	*:ino* *:inoremap*
+:ln[oremap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-l|	*:ln*  *:lnoremap*
+:cno[remap] {lhs} {rhs}		|mapmode-c|	*:cno* *:cnoremap*
 			Map the key sequence {lhs} to {rhs} for the modes
 			where the map command applies.  Disallow mapping of
 			{rhs}, to avoid nested and recursive mappings.  Often
@@ -306,9 +306,21 @@ is disabled.  This makes it possible to map zero without making it impossible
 to type a count with a zero.
 
 						*map-overview* *map-modes*
-Overview of which map command works in which mode:
+Overview of which map command works in which mode.  More details below.
+     COMMANDS                    MODES ~
+:map   :noremap  :unmap     Normal, Visual, Select, Operator-pending
+:nmap  :nnoremap :nunmap    Normal
+:vmap  :vnoremap :vunmap    Visual and Select
+:smap  :snoremap :sunmap    Select
+:xmap  :xnoremap :xunmap    Visual
+:omap  :onoremap :ounmap    Operator-pending
+:map!  :noremap! :unmap!    Insert and Command-line
+:imap  :inoremap :iunmap    Insert
+:lmap  :lnoremap :lunmap    Insert, Command-line, Lang-Arg
+:cmap  :cnoremap :cunmap    Command-line
 
-    commands:				      modes: ~
+
+    COMMANDS				      MODES ~
 				       Normal  Visual+Select  Operator-pending ~
 :map   :noremap   :unmap   :mapclear	 yes	    yes		   yes
 :nmap  :nnoremap  :nunmap  :nmapclear	 yes	     -		    -
@@ -324,7 +336,7 @@ NOTE: Mapping a printable character in Select mode may confuse the user.  It's
 better to explicitly use :xmap and :smap for printable characters.  Or use
 :sunmap after defining the mapping.
 
-    commands:				      modes: ~
+    COMMANDS				      MODES ~
 					  Visual    Select ~
 :vmap  :vnoremap  :vunmap  :vmapclear	    yes      yes
 :xmap  :xnoremap  :xunmap  :xmapclear	    yes       -
@@ -333,7 +345,7 @@ better to explicitly use :xmap and :smap for printable characters.  Or use
 			*mapmode-ic* *mapmode-i* *mapmode-c* *mapmode-l*
 Some commands work both in Insert mode and Command-line mode, some not:
 
-    commands:				      modes: ~
+    COMMANDS				      MODES ~
 					  Insert  Command-line	Lang-Arg ~
 :map!  :noremap!  :unmap!  :mapclear!	    yes	       yes	   -
 :imap  :inoremap  :iunmap  :imapclear	    yes		-	   -
@@ -593,7 +605,7 @@ illogical when compared to other commands.
 When you have a mapping that contains an Ex command, you need to put a line
 terminator after it to have it executed.  The use of <CR> is recommended for
 this (see |<>|).  Example: >
-   :map  _ls  :!ls -l %<CR>:echo "the end"<CR>
+   :map  _ls  :!ls -l %:S<CR>:echo "the end"<CR>
 
 To avoid mapping of the characters you type in insert or Command-line mode,
 type a CTRL-V first.  The mapping in Insert mode is disabled if the 'paste'
@@ -816,12 +828,10 @@ Here is an example that counts the number of spaces with <F4>: >
 	  let &selection = "inclusive"
 	  let reg_save = @@
 
-	  if a:0  " Invoked from Visual mode, use '< and '> marks.
-	    silent exe "normal! `<" . a:type . "`>y"
+	  if a:0  " Invoked from Visual mode, use gv command.
+	    silent exe "normal! gvy"
 	  elseif a:type == 'line'
 	    silent exe "normal! '[V']y"
-	  elseif a:type == 'block'
-	    silent exe "normal! `[\<C-V>`]y"
 	  else
 	    silent exe "normal! `[v`]y"
 	  endif

runtime/doc/motion.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*motion.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Jul 17
+*motion.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Feb 11
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ gg			Goto line [count], default first line, on the first
 			See also 'startofline' option.  {not in Vi}
 
 :[range]go[to] [count]					*:go* *:goto* *go*
-[count]go		Go to {count} byte in the buffer.  Default [count] is
+[count]go		Go to [count] byte in the buffer.  Default [count] is
 			one, start of the file.  When giving [range], the
 			last number in it used as the byte count.  End-of-line
 			characters are counted depending on the current

runtime/doc/options.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Dec 04
+*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Aug 09
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -1200,6 +1200,38 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	break if 'linebreak' is on.  Only works for ASCII and also for 8-bit
 	characters when 'encoding' is an 8-bit encoding.
 
+						*'breakindent'* *'bri'*
+'breakindent' 'bri'	boolean (default off)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
+			feature}
+	Every wrapped line will continue visually indented (same amount of
+	space as the beginning of that line), thus preserving horizontal blocks
+	of text.
+
+						*'breakindentopt'* *'briopt'*
+'breakindentopt' 'briopt' string (default empty)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
+			feature}
+	Settings for 'breakindent'. It can consist of the following optional
+	items and must be separated by a comma:
+		min:{n}	    Minimum text width that will be kept after
+			    applying 'breakindent', even if the resulting
+			    text should normally be narrower. This prevents
+			    text indented almost to the right window border
+			    occupying lot of vertical space when broken.
+		shift:{n}   After applying 'breakindent', the wrapped line's
+			    beginning will be shifted by the given number of
+			    characters.  It permits dynamic French paragraph
+			    indentation (negative) or emphasizing the line
+			    continuation (positive).
+		sbr	    Display the 'showbreak' value before applying the 
+			    additional indent.
+	The default value for min is 20 and shift is 0.
+
 						*'browsedir'* *'bsdir'*
 'browsedir' 'bsdir'	string	(default: "last")
 			global
@@ -2197,10 +2229,18 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	   zip		PkZip compatible method.  A weak kind of encryption.
 			Backwards compatible with Vim 7.2 and older.
 							*blowfish*
-	   blowfish	Blowfish method.  Strong encryption.  Requires Vim 7.3
-			or later, files can NOT be read by Vim 7.2 and older.
-			This adds a "seed" to the file, every time you write
-			the file the encrypted bytes will be different.
+	   blowfish	Blowfish method.  Medium strong encryption but it has
+			an implementation flaw.  Requires Vim 7.3 or later,
+			files can NOT be read by Vim 7.2 and older.  This adds
+			a "seed" to the file, every time you write the file
+			the encrypted bytes will be different.
+							*blowfish2*
+	   blowfish2	Blowfish method.  Medium strong encryption.  Requires
+			Vim 7.4.399 or later, files can NOT be read by Vim 7.3
+			and older.  This adds a "seed" to the file, every time
+			you write the file the encrypted bytes will be
+			different.  The whole undo file is encrypted, not just
+			the pieces of text.
 
 	When reading an encrypted file 'cryptmethod' will be set automatically
 	to the detected method of the file being read.  Thus if you write it
@@ -3920,12 +3960,13 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
 
 						*'history'* *'hi'*
-'history' 'hi'		number	(Vim default: 20, Vi default: 0)
+'history' 'hi'		number	(Vim default: 50, Vi default: 0)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 	A history of ":" commands, and a history of previous search patterns
-	are remembered.  This option decides how many entries may be stored in
+	is remembered.  This option decides how many entries may be stored in
 	each of these histories (see |cmdline-editing|).
+	The maximum value is 10000.
 	NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
 	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
 
@@ -4492,6 +4533,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	be able to execute Normal mode commands.
 	This is the opposite of the 'keymap' option, where characters are
 	mapped in Insert mode.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
 
 	Example (for Greek, in UTF-8):				*greek*  >
 	    :set langmap=ΑA,ΒB,ΨC,ΔD,ΕE,ΦF,ΓG,ΗH,ΙI,ΞJ,ΚK,ΛL,ΜM,ΝN,ΟO,ΠP,QQ,ΡR,ΣS,ΤT,ΘU,ΩV,WW,ΧX,ΥY,ΖZ,αa,βb,ψc,δd,εe,φf,γg,ηh,ιi,ξj,κk,λl,μm,νn,οo,πp,qq,ρr,σs,τt,θu,ωv,ςw,χx,υy,ζz
@@ -4572,12 +4615,13 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
 			feature}
-	If on Vim will wrap long lines at a character in 'breakat' rather
+	If on, Vim will wrap long lines at a character in 'breakat' rather
 	than at the last character that fits on the screen.  Unlike
 	'wrapmargin' and 'textwidth', this does not insert <EOL>s in the file,
-	it only affects the way the file is displayed, not its contents.  The
-	value of 'showbreak' is used to put in front of wrapped lines.
-	This option is not used when the 'wrap' option is off or 'list' is on.
+	it only affects the way the file is displayed, not its contents.
+	If 'breakindent' is set, line is visually indented. Then, the value
+	of 'showbreak' is used to put in front of wrapped lines. This option
+	is not used when the 'wrap' option is off.
 	Note that <Tab> characters after an <EOL> are mostly not displayed
 	with the right amount of white space.
 
@@ -4629,7 +4673,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 
 						*'lispwords'* *'lw'*
 'lispwords' 'lw'	string	(default is very long)
-			global
+			global or local to buffer |global-local|
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available when compiled without the |+lispindent|
 			feature}
@@ -4757,8 +4801,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			global or local to buffer |global-local|
 			{not in Vi}
 	Program to use for the ":make" command.  See |:make_makeprg|.
-	This option may contain '%' and '#' characters, which are expanded to
-	the current and alternate file name. |:_%| |:_#|
+	This option may contain '%' and '#' characters (see  |:_%| and |:_#|), 
+	which are expanded to the current and alternate file name.  Use |::S| 
+	to escape file names in case they contain special characters.
 	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash|
 	about including spaces and backslashes.
 	Note that a '|' must be escaped twice: once for ":set" and once for
@@ -5332,7 +5377,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Expression which is evaluated to apply a patch to a file and generate
 	the resulting new version of the file.  See |diff-patchexpr|.
 
-						*'patchmode'* *'pm'* *E206*
+					*'patchmode'* *'pm'* *E205* *E206*
 'patchmode' 'pm'	string	(default "")
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
@@ -5613,6 +5658,77 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	this option at the default "on".  Only switch it off when working with
 	old Vi scripts.
 
+                                               *'renderoptions'* *'rop'*
+'renderoptions' 'rop'	string  (default: empty)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with GUI and DIRECTX on
+			MS-Windows}
+	Select a text renderer and set its options.  The options depend on the
+	renderer.
+
+	Syntax: >
+		set rop=type:{renderer}(,{name}:{value})*
+<
+	Currently, only one optional renderer is available.
+
+	render	behavior    ~
+	directx	Vim will draw text using DirectX (DirectWrite).  It makes
+		drawn glyphs more beautiful than default GDI.
+		It requires 'encoding' is "utf-8", and only works on
+		MS-Windows Vista or newer version.
+
+		Options:
+		  name	    meaning		type	value       ~
+		  gamma	    gamma		float	1.0 - 2.2 (maybe)
+		  contrast  enhancedContrast	float	(unknown)
+		  level	    clearTypeLevel	float	(unknown)
+		  geom	    pixelGeometry	int	0 - 2 (see below)
+		  renmode   renderingMode	int	0 - 6 (see below)
+		  taamode   textAntialiasMode	int	0 - 3 (see below)
+
+		See this URL for detail:
+		  http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368190.aspx
+
+		For geom: structure of a device pixel.
+		  0 - DWRITE_PIXEL_GEOMETRY_FLAT
+		  1 - DWRITE_PIXEL_GEOMETRY_RGB
+		  2 - DWRITE_PIXEL_GEOMETRY_BGR
+
+		See this URL for detail:
+		  http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368114.aspx
+
+		For renmode: method of rendering glyphs.
+		  0 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_DEFAULT
+		  1 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_ALIASED
+		  2 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_GDI_CLASSIC
+		  3 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_GDI_NATURAL
+		  4 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_NATURAL
+		  5 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_NATURAL_SYMMETRIC
+		  6 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_OUTLINE
+
+		See this URL for detail:
+		  http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368118.aspx
+
+		For taamode: antialiasing mode used for drawing text.
+		  0 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_DEFAULT
+		  1 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_CLEARTYPE
+		  2 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_GRAYSCALE
+		  3 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_ALIASED
+
+		See this URL for detail:
+		  http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368170.aspx
+
+		Example: >
+		  set encoding=utf-8
+		  set gfn=Ricty_Diminished:h12:cSHIFTJIS
+		  set rop=type:directx
+<
+		If select a raster font (Courier, Terminal or FixedSys) to
+		'guifont', it fallbacks to be drawn by GDI automatically.
+
+	Other render types are currently not supported.
+
 						*'report'*
 'report'		number	(default 2)
 			global
@@ -6251,6 +6367,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	  A	don't give the "ATTENTION" message when an existing swap file
 		is found.
 	  I	don't give the intro message when starting Vim |:intro|.
+	  c	don't give |ins-completion-menu| messages.  For example,
+		"-- XXX completion (YYY)", "match 1 of 2", "The only match",
+		"Pattern not found", "Back at original", etc.
 
 	This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers
 	requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as
@@ -6618,6 +6737,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			top of the suggestion list with the internal methods.
 			Lines without a slash are ignored, use this for
 			comments.
+			The word in the second column must be correct,
+			otherwise it will not be used.  Add the word to an
+			".add" file if it is currently flagged as a spelling
+			mistake.
 			The file is used for all languages.
 
 	expr:{expr}	Evaluate expression {expr}.  Use a function to avoid
@@ -6881,6 +7004,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	immediately deleted.  When 'swapfile' is set, and 'updatecount' is
 	non-zero, a swap file is immediately created.
 	Also see |swap-file| and |'swapsync'|.
+	If you want to open a new buffer without creating a swap file for it,
+	use the |:noswapfile| modifier.
 
 	This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'buftype' to
 	specify special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.
@@ -7501,8 +7626,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 				"s"  = button state
 				"c"  = column plus 33
 				"r"  = row plus 33
-			This only works up to 223 columns!  See "dec" for a
-			solution.
+			This only works up to 223 columns!  See "dec",
+			"urxvt", and "sgr" for solutions.
 	   xterm2	Works like "xterm", but with the xterm reporting the
 			mouse position while the mouse is dragged.  This works
 			much faster and more precise.  Your xterm must at
@@ -7524,29 +7649,35 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	   pterm	QNX pterm mouse handling.
 							*urxvt-mouse*
 	   urxvt	Mouse handling for the urxvt (rxvt-unicode) terminal.
+			The mouse works only if the terminal supports this
+			encoding style, but it does not have 223 columns limit
+			unlike "xterm" or "xterm2".
 							*sgr-mouse*
 	   sgr		Mouse handling for the terminal that emits SGR-styled
-			mouse reporting. Works with xterm version 277 or
-			later.
+			mouse reporting.  The mouse works even in columns
+			beyond 223.  This option is backward compatible with
+			"xterm2" because it can also decode "xterm2" style
+			mouse codes.
 
 	The mouse handling must be enabled at compile time |+mouse_xterm|
-	|+mouse_dec| |+mouse_netterm|.
+	|+mouse_dec| |+mouse_netterm| |+mouse_jsbterm| |+mouse_urxvt|
+	|+mouse_sgr|.
 	Only "xterm"(2) is really recognized.  NetTerm mouse codes are always
 	recognized, if enabled at compile time.  DEC terminal mouse codes
 	are recognized if enabled at compile time, and 'ttymouse' is not
-	"xterm" (because the xterm and dec mouse codes conflict).
+	"xterm", "xterm2", "urxvt" or "sgr" (because dec mouse codes conflict
+	with them).
 	This option is automatically set to "xterm", when the 'term' option is
-	set to a name that starts with "xterm", and 'ttymouse' is not "xterm"
-	or "xterm2" already.  The main use of this option is to set it to
-	"xterm", when the terminal name doesn't start with "xterm", but it can
-	handle xterm mouse codes.
-	The "sgr" value will be set if the xterm version is 277 or later.
+	set to a name that starts with "xterm", "mlterm", or "screen", and
+	'ttymouse' is not set already.
+	Additionally, if vim is compiled with the |+termresponse| feature and
+	|t_RV| is set to the escape sequence to request the xterm version
+	number, more intelligent detection process runs.
 	The "xterm2" value will be set if the xterm version is reported to be
-	95 or higher.  This only works when compiled with the |+termresponse|
-	feature and if |t_RV| is set to the escape sequence to request the
-	xterm version number.  Otherwise "xterm2" must be set explicitly.
-	If you do not want 'ttymouse' to be set to "xterm2" automatically, set
-	t_RV to an empty string: >
+	from 95 to 276.  The "sgr" value will be set if the xterm version is
+	277 or highter.
+	If you do not want 'ttymouse' to be set to "xterm2" or "sgr"
+	automatically, set t_RV to an empty string: >
 		:set t_RV=
 <
 						*'ttyscroll'* *'tsl'*

runtime/doc/os_vms.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_vms.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Aug 22
+*os_vms.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Feb 24
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL
@@ -764,6 +764,22 @@ GNU_TOOLS.ZIP package downloadable from http://www.polarhome.com/vim/
 
 9. VMS related changes					*vms-changes*
 
+Version 7.4 
+- Undo: VMS can not handle more than one dot in the filenames use "dir/name" -> "dir/_un_name" 
+  add _un_ at the beginning to keep the extension
+- correct swap file name wildcard handling
+- handle iconv usage correctly
+- do not optimize on vax - otherwise it hangs compiling crypto files
+- fileio.c fix the comment
+- correct RealWaitForChar 
+- after 7.4-119 use different functions lib$cvtf_to_internal_time because Alpha and VAX have
+  G_FLOAT but IA64 uses IEEE float otherwise Vim crashes
+- guard agains crashes that are caused by mixed filenames
+- [TESTDIR]make_vms.mms changed to see the output files
+- Improve tests, update known issues
+- minor compiler warnings fixed
+- CTAGS 5.8 +regex included
+
 Version 7.3
 - CTAGS 5.8 included
 - VMS compile warnings fixed - floating-point overflow warning corrected on VAX

runtime/doc/pattern.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Nov 09
+*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Jul 30
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -192,10 +192,10 @@ affected.
 An example of how to search for matches with a pattern and change the match
 with another word: >
 	/foo<CR>	find "foo"
-	c//e		change until end of match
+	c//e<CR>	change until end of match
 	bar<Esc>	type replacement
 	//<CR>		go to start of next match
-	c//e		change until end of match
+	c//e<CR>	change until end of match
 	beep<Esc>	type another replacement
 			etc.
 <
@@ -545,6 +545,7 @@ Character classes {not in Vi}:				*/character-classes*
 |/\%u|	\%u	\%u	match specified multibyte character (eg \%u20ac)
 |/\%U|	\%U	\%U	match specified large multibyte character (eg
 			\%U12345678)
+|/\%C|	\%C	\%C	match any composing characters
 
 Example			matches ~
 \<\I\i*		or
@@ -705,11 +706,18 @@ overview.
 	But to limit the time needed, only the line where what follows matches
 	is searched, and one line before that (if there is one).  This should
 	be sufficient to match most things and not be too slow.
-	The part of the pattern after "\@<=" and "\@<!" are checked for a
-	match first, thus things like "\1" don't work to reference \(\) inside
-	the preceding atom.  It does work the other way around:
-	Example			matches ~
-	\1\@<=,\([a-z]\+\)	",abc" in "abc,abc"
+
+	In the old regexp engine the part of the pattern after "\@<=" and
+	"\@<!" are checked for a match first, thus things like "\1" don't work
+	to reference \(\) inside the preceding atom.  It does work the other
+	way around:
+	Bad example			matches ~
+	\%#=1\1\@<=,\([a-z]\+\)		",abc" in "abc,abc"
+
+	However, the new regexp engine works differently, it is better to not
+	rely on this behavior, do not use \@<= if it can be avoided:
+	Example				matches ~
+	\([a-z]\+\)\zs,\1		",abc" in "abc,abc"
 
 \@123<=
 	Like "\@<=" but only look back 123 bytes. This avoids trying lots
@@ -1207,12 +1215,18 @@ will probably never match.
 8. Composing characters					*patterns-composing*
 
 							*/\Z*
-When "\Z" appears anywhere in the pattern, composing characters are ignored.
-Thus only the base characters need to match, the composing characters may be
-different and the number of composing characters may differ.  Only relevant
-when 'encoding' is "utf-8".
+When "\Z" appears anywhere in the pattern, all composing characters are
+ignored.  Thus only the base characters need to match, the composing
+characters may be different and the number of composing characters may differ.
+Only relevant when 'encoding' is "utf-8".
 Exception: If the pattern starts with one or more composing characters, these
 must match.
+							*/\%C*
+Use "\%C" to skip any composing characters.  For example, the pattern "a" does
+not match in "càt" (where the a has the composing character 0x0300), but
+"a\%C" does.  Note that this does not match "cát" (where the á is character
+0xe1, it does not have a compositing character).  It does match "cat" (where
+the a is just an a).
 
 When a composing character appears at the start of the pattern of after an
 item that doesn't include the composing character, a match is found at any
@@ -1325,7 +1339,7 @@ Finally, these constructs are unique to Perl:
 		patterns defined by both |matchadd()| and |:match|.
 
 		Highlighting matches using |:match| are limited to three
-		matches (aside from |:match|, |:2match| and |:3match|are
+		matches (aside from |:match|, |:2match| and |:3match| are
 		available). |matchadd()| does not have this limitation and in
 		addition makes it possible to prioritize matches.
 

runtime/doc/pi_netrw.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pi_netrw.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Jan 21
+*pi_netrw.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 May 13
 
 	    ------------------------------------------------
 	    NETRW REFERENCE MANUAL    by Charles E. Campbell
@@ -49,6 +49,7 @@ Copyright: Copyright (C) 1999-2014 Charles E Campbell    *netrw-copyright*
       Quick Reference: Commands...........................|netrw-browse-cmds|
       Bookmarking A Directory.............................|netrw-mb|
       Browsing............................................|netrw-cr|
+        Squeezing the Current Tree-Listing Directory......|:netrw-s-cr|
       Browsing With A Horizontally Split Window...........|netrw-o|
       Browsing With A New Tab.............................|netrw-t|
       Browsing With A Vertically Split Window.............|netrw-v|
@@ -172,7 +173,7 @@ There are more protocols supported by netrw than just scp and ftp, too: see the
 next section, |netrw-externapp|, on how to use these external applications with
 netrw and vim.
 
-PREVENTING LOADING						*netrw-noload*
+PREVENTING LOADING					*netrw-noload*
 
 If you want to use plugins, but for some reason don't wish to use netrw, then
 you need to avoid loading both the plugin and the autoload portions of netrw.
@@ -183,7 +184,7 @@ You may do so by placing the following two lines in your <.vimrc>: >
 <
 
 ==============================================================================
-3. Netrw Reference						*netrw-ref* {{{1
+3. Netrw Reference					*netrw-ref* {{{1
 
    Netrw supports several protocols in addition to scp and ftp as mentioned
    in |netrw-start|.  These include dav, fetch, http,... well, just look
@@ -290,7 +291,7 @@ SOURCING					*netrw-source* {{{2
 	:Nsource "scp://[user@]machine[[:#]port]/path"	uses scp
 	:Nsource "sftp://[user@]machine/path"		uses sftp
 
-DIRECTORY LISTING			*netrw-trailingslash* *netrw-dirlist* {{{2
+DIRECTORY LISTING		*netrw-trailingslash* *netrw-dirlist* {{{2
 
 	One may browse a directory to get a listing by simply attempting to
 	edit the directory: >
@@ -347,9 +348,9 @@ settings are described below, in |netrw-browser-options|, and in
  *g:netrw_bufsettings*	the settings that netrw buffers have
  			(default) noma nomod nonu nowrap ro nobl
 
- *g:netrw_chgwin*	specifies a window number where file edits will take
-			place.  (also see |netrw-C|)
-			(default) not defined
+ *g:netrw_chgwin*	specifies a window number where subsequent file edits
+			will take place.  (also see |netrw-C|)
+			(default) -1
 
  *g:Netrw_funcref*	specifies a function (or functions) to be called when
 			netrw edits a file.  The file is first edited, and
@@ -370,9 +371,9 @@ settings are described below, in |netrw-browser-options|, and in
 			   value of this variable to see if the alternate ftp
 			   method works for your setup.
 
- *g:netrw_ftp_options*     Chosen by default, these options are supposed to turn
-			 interactive prompting off and to restrain ftp from
-			 attempting auto-login upon initial connection.
+ *g:netrw_ftp_options*     Chosen by default, these options are supposed to
+			 turn interactive prompting off and to restrain ftp
+			 from attempting auto-login upon initial connection.
 			 However, it appears that not all ftp implementations
 			 support this (ex. ncftp).
 		        ="-i -n"
@@ -403,8 +404,8 @@ settings are described below, in |netrw-browser-options|, and in
  *g:netrw_preview*	=0 (default) preview window shown in a horizontally
 			   split window
 			=1 preview window shown in a vertically split window.
-			   Also affects the "previous window" (see |netrw-P|) in
-			   the same way.
+			   Also affects the "previous window" (see |netrw-P|)
+			   in the same way.
 
  *g:netrw_scpport*	= "-P" : option to use to set port for scp
  *g:netrw_sshport*	= "-p" : option to use to set port for ssh
@@ -542,15 +543,17 @@ which contains ftp commands which will be automatically run whenever ftp
 starts.  You may use this feature to enter a user and password for one site: >
 	userid
 	password
-<					*netrw-windows-netrc*  *netrw-windows-s*
-If |g:netrw_ftp_cmd| contains -s:[path/]MACHINE, then (on Windows machines only)
-netrw will substitute the current machine name requested for ftp connections
-for MACHINE.  Hence one can have multiple machine.ftp files containing login
-and password for ftp.  Example: >
+<				*netrw-windows-netrc*  *netrw-windows-s*
+If |g:netrw_ftp_cmd| contains -s:[path/]MACHINE, then (on Windows machines
+only) netrw will substitute the current machine name requested for ftp
+connections for MACHINE.  Hence one can have multiple machine.ftp files
+containing login and password for ftp.  Example: >
 
     let g:netrw_ftp_cmd= 'c:\Windows\System32\ftp -s:C:\Users\Myself\MACHINE'
     vim ftp://myhost.somewhere.net/
+
 will use a file >
+
 	C:\Users\Myself\myhost.ftp
 <
 Often, ftp will need to query the user for the userid and password.
@@ -680,7 +683,7 @@ your <.vimrc> customization file: >
 <
 
 ==============================================================================
-6. Transparent Remote File Editing			*netrw-transparent* {{{1
+6. Transparent Remote File Editing		*netrw-transparent* {{{1
 
 Transparent file transfers occur whenever a regular file read or write
 (invoked via an |:autocmd| for |BufReadCmd|, |BufWriteCmd|, or |SourceCmd|
@@ -754,7 +757,7 @@ below, a {netfile} is an url to a remote file.
 
 
 ==============================================================================
-8. Variables and Options			*netrw-var* *netrw-settings* {{{1
+8. Variables and Options		*netrw-var* *netrw-settings* {{{1
 
 (also see: |netrw-options| |netrw-variables| |netrw-protocol|
            |netrw-browser-settings| |netrw-browser-options| )
@@ -794,7 +797,7 @@ set in the user's <.vimrc> file: (see also |netrw-settings| |netrw-protocol|)
                                 =1 use default method to do ftp >
 	-----------------------------------------------------------------------
 <
-							*netrw-internal-variables*
+						*netrw-internal-variables*
 The script will also make use of the following variables internally, albeit
 temporarily.
 >
@@ -1041,8 +1044,8 @@ QUICK REFERENCE: MAPS				*netrw-browse-maps* {{{2
 	 <del>	Netrw will attempt to remove the file/directory      |netrw-del|
 	   -	Makes Netrw go up one directory                      |netrw--|
 	   a	Toggles between normal display,                      |netrw-a|
-		hiding (suppress display of files matching g:netrw_list_hide)
-		showing (display only files which match g:netrw_list_hide)
+	    	hiding (suppress display of files matching g:netrw_list_hide)
+	    	showing (display only files which match g:netrw_list_hide)
 	   c	Make browsing directory the current directory        |netrw-c|
 	   C	Setting the editing window                           |netrw-C|
 	   d	Make a directory                                     |netrw-d|
@@ -1067,7 +1070,7 @@ QUICK REFERENCE: MAPS				*netrw-browse-maps* {{{2
 	   mx	Apply arbitrary shell command to marked files        |netrw-mx|
 	   mz	Compress/decompress marked files                     |netrw-mz|
 	   o	Enter the file/directory under the cursor in a new   |netrw-o|
-		browser window.  A horizontal split is used.
+	    	browser window.  A horizontal split is used.
 	   O	Obtain a file specified by cursor                    |netrw-O|
 	   p	Preview the file                                     |netrw-p|
 	   P	Browse in the previously used window                 |netrw-P|
@@ -1081,7 +1084,7 @@ QUICK REFERENCE: MAPS				*netrw-browse-maps* {{{2
 	   u	Change to recently-visited directory                 |netrw-u|
 	   U	Change to subsequently-visited directory             |netrw-U|
 	   v	Enter the file/directory under the cursor in a new   |netrw-v|
-		browser window.  A vertical split is used.
+	    	browser window.  A vertical split is used.
 	   x	View file with an associated program                 |netrw-x|
 	   X	Execute filename under cursor via |system()|           |netrw-X|
 
@@ -1095,9 +1098,9 @@ QUICK REFERENCE: MAPS				*netrw-browse-maps* {{{2
 	<rightmouse>	(gvim only) delete file/directory using word under
 			mouse
 	<2-leftmouse>	(gvim only) when:
-	                 * in a netrw-selected file, AND
-		         * |g:netrw_retmap| == 1     AND
-		         * the user doesn't already have a <2-leftmouse>
+			 * in a netrw-selected file, AND
+			 * |g:netrw_retmap| == 1     AND
+			 * the user doesn't already have a <2-leftmouse>
 			   mapping defined before netrw is autoloaded,
 			then a double clicked leftmouse button will return
 			to the netrw browser window.  See |g:netrw_retmap|.
@@ -1179,6 +1182,12 @@ are introduced into a directory), the listing may become out-of-date.  One may
 always refresh directory listing buffers by pressing ctrl-L (see
 |netrw-ctrl-l|).
 
+								*:netrw-s-cr*
+    Squeezing the Current Tree-Listing Directory~
+    When the tree listing style is enabled (see |netrw-i|) and one is using
+    gvim, then the <s-cr> mapping may be used to squeeze (close) the
+    directory currently containing the cursor.
+
 
 Related topics: |netrw-o| |netrw-p| |netrw-P| |netrw-t| |netrw-v|
 Associated setting variables: |g:netrw_browse_split|      |g:netrw_fastbrowse|
@@ -1227,9 +1236,7 @@ cursor at the left.
 There is only one tree listing buffer; using "v" on a displayed subdirectory
 will split the screen, but the same buffer will be shown twice.
 
-Associated setting variable: |g:netrw_altv| |g:netrw_winsize|
-
-Related Actions |netrw-cr| |netrw-o| |netrw-t| |netrw-v|
+Related Actions: |netrw-cr| |netrw-o| |netrw-t| |netrw-v|
 Associated setting variables:
    |g:netrw_altv|    control right/left splitting
    |g:netrw_winsize| control initial sizing
@@ -1251,11 +1258,12 @@ The wide listing format uses two or more contiguous spaces to delineate
 filenames; when using that format, netrw won't be able to recognize or use
 filenames which have two or more contiguous spaces embedded in the name or any
 trailing spaces.  The thin listing format will, however, work with such files.
-This listing format is the most compact.
+The wide listing format is the most compact.
 
 The tree listing format has a top directory followed by files and directories
-preceded by a "|".  One may open and close directories by pressing the <cr>
-key while atop the directory name.
+preceded by one or more "|"s, which indicate the directory depth.  One may
+open and close directories by pressing the <cr> key while atop the directory
+name.
 
 One may make a preferred listing style your default; see |g:netrw_liststyle|.
 As an example, by putting the following line in your .vimrc, >
@@ -1455,8 +1463,16 @@ If files have been marked with |netrw-mf|:   (local marked file list)
     Marked files (and empty directories) will be deleted; again, you'll be
     asked to confirm the deletion before it actually takes place.
 
+A further approach is to delete files which match a pattern.
+
+    * use  :MF pattern  (see |netrw-:MF|); then press "D".
+
+    * use mr (see |netrw-mr|) which will prompt you for pattern.
+      This will cause the matching files to be marked.  Then,
+      press "D".
+
 The |g:netrw_rm_cmd|, |g:netrw_rmf_cmd|, and |g:netrw_rmdir_cmd| variables are
-used to control the attempts to remove files and directories.  The
+used to control the attempts to remove remote files and directories.  The
 g:netrw_rm_cmd is used with files, and its default value is:
 
 	g:netrw_rm_cmd: ssh HOSTNAME rm
@@ -1464,12 +1480,12 @@ g:netrw_rm_cmd is used with files, and its default value is:
 The g:netrw_rmdir_cmd variable is used to support the removal of directories.
 Its default value is:
 
-	g:netrw_rmdir_cmd: ssh HOSTNAME rmdir
+	|g:netrw_rmdir_cmd|: ssh HOSTNAME rmdir
 
 If removing a directory fails with g:netrw_rmdir_cmd, netrw then will attempt
 to remove it again using the g:netrw_rmf_cmd variable.  Its default value is:
 
-	g:netrw_rmf_cmd: ssh HOSTNAME rm -f
+	|g:netrw_rmf_cmd|: ssh HOSTNAME rm -f
 
 Related topics: |netrw-d|
 Associated setting variable: |g:netrw_localrmdir| |g:netrw_rm_cmd|
@@ -1482,7 +1498,7 @@ DIRECTORY EXPLORATION COMMANDS  {{{2
 
      :[N]Explore[!]  [dir]... Explore directory of current file      *:Explore*
      :[N]Hexplore[!] [dir]... Horizontal Split & Explore             *:Hexplore*
-     :Rexplore            ... Return to Explorer                     *:Rexplore*
+     :Rexplore            ... Return to/from Explorer                *:Rexplore*
      :[N]Sexplore[!] [dir]... Split&Explore current file's directory *:Sexplore*
      :Texplore       [dir]... Tab              & Explore             *:Texplore*
      :[N]Vexplore[!] [dir]... Vertical   Split & Explore             *:Vexplore*
@@ -1492,23 +1508,36 @@ DIRECTORY EXPLORATION COMMANDS  {{{2
      :Nexplore............. go to next matching file                *:Nexplore*
      :Pexplore............. go to previous matching file            *:Pexplore*
 
+						*netrw-:Explore*
 :Explore  will open the local-directory browser on the current file's
           directory (or on directory [dir] if specified).  The window will be
 	  split only if the file has been modified, otherwise the browsing
 	  window will take over that window.  Normally the splitting is taken
 	  horizontally.
+	  Also see: |netrw-:Rexplore|
 :Explore! is like :Explore, but will use vertical splitting.
+						*netrw-:Lexplore*
 :Lexplore [dir] toggles an Explorer window on the left hand side
           of the current tab  It will open a netrw window on the current
-	  directory if [dir] is omitted.
+	  directory if [dir] is omitted; a :Lexplore [dir] will show
+	  the specified directory in the left-hand side browser display
+	  no matter from which window the command is issued.  By default,
+	  :Lexplore will change an uninitialized |g:netrw_chgwin| to 2;
+	  edits will thus be preferentially made in window#2.
+	  Also see: |netrw-C|| |g:netrw_chgwin| |g:netrw_winsize|
+	  	    |netrw-p| |netrw-P|| |g:netrw_browse_split|
+						*netrw-:Sexplore*
 :Sexplore will always split the window before invoking the local-directory
           browser.  As with Explore, the splitting is normally done
 	  horizontally.
 :Sexplore! [dir] is like :Sexplore, but the splitting will be done vertically.
+						*netrw-:Hexplore*
 :Hexplore  [dir] does an :Explore with |:belowright| horizontal splitting.
 :Hexplore! [dir] does an :Explore with |:aboveleft|  horizontal splitting.
+						*netrw-:Vexplore*
 :Vexplore  [dir] does an :Explore with |:leftabove|  vertical splitting.
 :Vexplore! [dir] does an :Explore with |:rightbelow| vertical splitting.
+						*netrw-:Texplore*
 :Texplore  [dir] does a |:tabnew| before generating the browser window
 
 By default, these commands use the current file's directory.  However, one may
@@ -1521,12 +1550,23 @@ Otherwise, the |g:netrw_winsize| variable, if it has been specified by the
 user, is used to control the quantity of rows and/or columns new explorer
 windows should have.
 
-:Rexplore  This command is a little different from the others.  When one
-           edits a file, for example by pressing <cr> when atop a file in
-	   a netrw browser window, :Rexplore will return the display to
-	   that of the last netrw browser window.  It is a command version
-	   of the <2-leftmouse> map (which is only available under gvim and
-	   cooperative terms).
+						*netrw-:Rexplore*
+:Rexplore  This command is a little different from the others as it doesn't
+	   necessarily open an Explorer window.
+
+	   Return to Explorer~
+	   When one edits a file, for example by pressing <cr> when the
+	   cursor is atop a file in a netrw browser window, :Rexplore will
+	   return the display to that of the last netrw browser display
+	   in that window.
+
+	   Return from Explorer~
+	   Conversely, when one is editing a directory, issuing a :Rexplore
+	   will return to editing the file that was last edited in that
+	   window.
+
+	   The <2-leftmouse> map (which is only available under gvim and
+	   cooperative terms) does the same as :Rexplore.
 
 Also see: |g:netrw_alto| |g:netrw_altv| |g:netrw_winsize|
 
@@ -1572,11 +1612,12 @@ As an example, consider
 The status line will show, on the right hand side of the status line, a
 message like "Match 3 of 20".
 
-Associated setting variables: |g:netrw_keepdir|      |g:netrw_browse_split|
-                              |g:netrw_fastbrowse|   |g:netrw_ftp_browse_reject|
-			      |g:netrw_ftp_list_cmd| |g:netrw_ftp_sizelist_cmd|
-			      |g:netrw_ftp_timelist_cmd| |g:netrw_list_cmd|
-			      |g:netrw_liststyle|
+Associated setting variables:
+	|g:netrw_keepdir|          |g:netrw_browse_split|
+	|g:netrw_fastbrowse|       |g:netrw_ftp_browse_reject|
+	|g:netrw_ftp_list_cmd|     |g:netrw_ftp_sizelist_cmd|
+	|g:netrw_ftp_timelist_cmd| |g:netrw_list_cmd|
+	|g:netrw_liststyle|
 
 
 DISPLAYING INFORMATION ABOUT FILE				*netrw-qf* {{{2
@@ -1666,10 +1707,10 @@ entry in the listing.
 
 Netrw will use the command in |g:netrw_list_cmd| to perform the directory
 listing operation after changing HOSTNAME to the host specified by the
-user-provided url.  By default netrw provides the command as:
+user-prpvided url.  By default netrw provides the command as: >
 
 	ssh HOSTNAME ls -FLa
-
+<
 where the HOSTNAME becomes the [user@]hostname as requested by the attempt to
 read.  Naturally, the user may override this command with whatever is
 preferred.  The NetList function which implements remote browsing
@@ -1882,12 +1923,29 @@ directory.
 
 Associated setting variable: |g:netrw_keepdir|
 
-MARKING FILES							*netrw-mf* {{{2
+MARKING FILES					*netrw-:MF*	*netrw-mf* {{{2
 	(also see |netrw-mr|)
 
-One may mark files with the cursor atop a filename and then pressing "mf".
-With gvim, one may also mark files with <s-leftmouse>.  The following netrw
-maps make use of marked files:
+Netrw has several ways of marking files:
+
+	* One may mark files with the cursor atop a filename and
+	  then pressing "mf".
+
+	* With gvim, in addition one may mark files with
+	  <s-leftmouse>. (see |netrw-mouse|)
+
+	* One may use the :MF command, which takes a list of
+	  files (for local directories, the list may include
+	  wildcards -- see |glob()|) >
+
+		:MF *.c
+<
+	* Note that :MF uses |<f-args>| to break the line
+	  at spaces.
+
+	* Mark files based upon the quickfix list (|netrw-qF|)
+
+The following netrw maps make use of marked files:
 
     |netrw-a|	Hide marked files/directories
     |netrw-D|	Delete marked files/directories
@@ -1896,13 +1954,12 @@ maps make use of marked files:
     |netrw-me|	Edit marked files
     |netrw-mF|	Unmark marked files
     |netrw-mg|	Apply vimgrep to marked files
-    |netrw-mm|	Move marked files
+    |netrw-mm|	Move marked files to target
     |netrw-mp|	Print marked files
     |netrw-mt|	Set target for |netrw-mm| and |netrw-mc|
     |netrw-mT|	Generate tags using marked files
     |netrw-mx|	Apply shell command to marked files
     |netrw-mz|	Compress/Decompress marked files
-    |netrw-qF|	Mark files using quickfix list
     |netrw-O|	Obtain marked files
     |netrw-R|	Rename marked files
 
@@ -1933,6 +1990,12 @@ means that each directory has its own local marked file list.  The various
 commands which operate on marked files use one or the other of the marked file
 lists.
 
+Known Problem: if one is using tree mode (|g:netrw_liststyle|) and several
+directories have files with the same name,  then marking such a file will
+result in all such files being highlighted as if they were all marked.  The
+|markfilelist|, however, will only have the selected file in it.  This problem
+is unlikely to be fixed.
+
 
 UNMARKING FILES							*netrw-mF* {{{2
 	(also see |netrw-mf|)
@@ -2090,6 +2153,10 @@ Set the marked file copy/move-to target (see |netrw-mc| and |netrw-mm|):
   * However, if the cursor is atop a directory name, then that directory is
     used for the copy/move-to target
 
+  * One may use the :MT [directory] command to set the target	*netrw-:MT*
+    This command uses |<q-args>|, so spaces in the directory name are
+    permitted without escaping.
+
 There is only one copy/move-to target per vim session; ie. the target is a
 script variable (see |s:var|) and is shared between all netrw windows (in an
 instance of vim).
@@ -2120,9 +2187,9 @@ http://www.drchip.org/astronaut/src/index.html , and have >
 in my <.vimrc>.
 
 When a remote set of files are tagged, the resulting tags file is "obtained";
-ie. a copy is transferred to the local system's directory.  The local tags
+ie. a copy is transferred to the local system's directory.  The now local tags
 file is then modified so that one may use it through the network.  The
-modification is concerns the names of the files in the tags; each filename is
+modification made concerns the names of the files in the tags; each filename is
 preceded by the netrw-compatible url used to obtain it.  When one subsequently
 uses one of the go to tag actions (|tags|), the url will be used by netrw to
 edit the desired file and go to the tag.
@@ -2131,34 +2198,38 @@ Associated setting variables: |g:netrw_ctags| |g:netrw_ssh_cmd|
 
 MARKED FILES: TARGET DIRECTORY USING BOOKMARKS  		*netrw-Tb* {{{2
 
-Sets the marked file copy/move-to target (see |netrw-mc| and |netrw-mm|).
+Sets the marked file copy/move-to target.
 
 The |netrw-qb| map will give you a list of bookmarks (and history).
 One may choose one of the bookmarks to become your marked file
 target by using [count]Tb (default count: 1).
 
 Related topics:
+      Copying files to target............................|netrw-mc|
       Listing Bookmarks and History......................|netrw-qb|
       Marked Files: Setting The Target Directory.........|netrw-mt|
       Marked Files: Target Directory Using History.......|netrw-Th|
       Marking Files......................................|netrw-mf|
       Marking Files by Regular Expression................|netrw-mr|
+      Moving files to target.............................|netrw-mm|
 
 
 MARKED FILES: TARGET DIRECTORY USING HISTORY	  		*netrw-Th* {{{2
 
-Sets the marked file copy/move-to target (see |netrw-mc| and |netrw-mm|).
+Sets the marked file copy/move-to target.
 
 The |netrw-qb| map will give you a list of history (and bookmarks).
 One may choose one of the history entries to become your marked file
 target by using [count]Th (default count: 0; ie. the current directory).
 
 Related topics:
+      Copying files to target............................|netrw-mc|
       Listing Bookmarks and History......................|netrw-qb|
       Marked Files: Setting The Target Directory.........|netrw-mt|
       Marked Files: Target Directory Using Bookmarks.....|netrw-Tb|
       Marking Files......................................|netrw-mf|
       Marking Files by Regular Expression................|netrw-mr|
+      Moving files to target.............................|netrw-mm|
 
 
 MARKED FILES: UNMARKING						*netrw-mu* {{{2
@@ -2282,6 +2353,7 @@ your browsing preferences.  (see also: |netrw-settings|)
   *g:netrw_dynamic_maxfilenamelen* =32: enables dynamic determination of
 				    |g:netrw_maxfilenamelen|, which affects
 				    local file long listing.
+
   *g:netrw_errorlvl*		=0: error levels greater than or equal to
 				    this are permitted to be displayed
 				    0: notes
@@ -2289,7 +2361,7 @@ your browsing preferences.  (see also: |netrw-settings|)
 				    2: errors
 
   *g:netrw_fastbrowse*		=0: slow speed directory browsing;
-				    never re-uses directory listings,
+				    never re-uses directory listings;
 				    always obtains directory listings.
 				=1: medium speed directory browsing;
 				    re-use directory listings only
@@ -2312,6 +2384,11 @@ your browsing preferences.  (see also: |netrw-settings|)
 				trading off accuracy (ie. up-to-date listing)
 				versus speed.
 
+  *g:netrw_ffkeep*		(default: doesn't exist)
+  				If this variable exists and is zero, then
+				netrw will not do a save and restore for
+				|'fileformat'|.
+
   *g:netrw_fname_escape*	=' ?&;%'
 				Used on filenames before remote reading/writing
 
@@ -2434,7 +2511,7 @@ your browsing preferences.  (see also: |netrw-settings|)
 				evaluation will be suppressed
 				(see |'ballooneval'|)
 
-  *g:netrw_remote_mkdir*	command for making a local directory
+  *g:netrw_remote_mkdir*	command for making a remote directory
 				via ftp  (also see |g:netrw_mkdir_cmd|)
 				 default: "mkdir"
 
@@ -2457,13 +2534,13 @@ your browsing preferences.  (see also: |netrw-settings|)
 
 				  default: =0
 
-  *g:netrw_rm_cmd*		command for removing files
+  *g:netrw_rm_cmd*		command for removing remote files
 				 default: "ssh USEPORT HOSTNAME rm"
 
-  *g:netrw_rmdir_cmd*		command for removing directories
+  *g:netrw_rmdir_cmd*		command for removing remote directories
 				 default: "ssh USEPORT HOSTNAME rmdir"
 
-  *g:netrw_rmf_cmd*		command for removing softlinks
+  *g:netrw_rmf_cmd*		command for removing remote softlinks
 				 default: "ssh USEPORT HOSTNAME rm -f"
 
   *g:netrw_sort_by*		sort by "name", "time", or "size"
@@ -2482,7 +2559,7 @@ your browsing preferences.  (see also: |netrw-settings|)
 
   *g:netrw_sort_sequence*	when sorting by name, first sort by the
 				comma-separated pattern sequence.  Note that
-				the filigree added to indicate filetypes
+				any filigree added to indicate filetypes
 				should be accounted for in your pattern.
 				 default: '[\/]$,*,\.bak$,\.o$,\.h$,
 				           \.info$,\.swp$,\.obj$'
@@ -2498,7 +2575,7 @@ your browsing preferences.  (see also: |netrw-settings|)
 					netrwMakefile: [mM]akefile *.mak
 					netrwObj     : *.o *.obj
 					netrwTags    : tags ANmenu ANtags
-					netrwTilde   : *~
+					netrwTilde   : *
 					netrwTmp     : tmp* *tmp
 
 				These syntax highlighting groups are linked
@@ -2507,8 +2584,27 @@ your browsing preferences.  (see also: |netrw-settings|)
 				one may put lines like >
 					hi link netrwCompress Visual
 <				into one's <.vimrc> to use one's own
-				preferences.
+				preferences.  Alternatively, one may
+				put such specifications into
+				.vim/after/syntax/netrw.vim.
 
+				As an example, I myself use a dark-background
+				colorscheme with the following in
+				.vim/after/syntax/netrw.vim: >
+
+ hi netrwCompress term=NONE cterm=NONE gui=NONE ctermfg=10 guifg=green  ctermbg=0 guibg=black
+ hi netrwData	  term=NONE cterm=NONE gui=NONE ctermfg=9 guifg=blue ctermbg=0 guibg=black
+ hi netrwHdr	  term=NONE cterm=NONE,italic gui=NONE guifg=SeaGreen1
+ hi netrwLex	  term=NONE cterm=NONE,italic gui=NONE guifg=SeaGreen1
+ hi netrwYacc	  term=NONE cterm=NONE,italic gui=NONE guifg=SeaGreen1
+ hi netrwLib	  term=NONE cterm=NONE gui=NONE ctermfg=14 guifg=yellow
+ hi netrwObj	  term=NONE cterm=NONE gui=NONE ctermfg=12 guifg=red
+ hi netrwTilde	  term=NONE cterm=NONE gui=NONE ctermfg=12 guifg=red
+ hi netrwTmp	  term=NONE cterm=NONE gui=NONE ctermfg=12 guifg=red
+ hi netrwTags	  term=NONE cterm=NONE gui=NONE ctermfg=12 guifg=red
+ hi netrwDoc	  term=NONE cterm=NONE gui=NONE ctermfg=220 ctermbg=27 guifg=yellow2 guibg=Blue3
+ hi netrwSymLink  term=NONE cterm=NONE gui=NONE ctermfg=220 ctermbg=27 guifg=grey60
+<
   *g:netrw_ssh_browse_reject*	ssh can sometimes produce unwanted lines,
 				messages, banners, and whatnot that one doesn't
 				want masquerading as "directories" and "files".
@@ -2543,6 +2639,7 @@ your browsing preferences.  (see also: |netrw-settings|)
 				ml_get errors, try putting
 				  let g:netrw_use_noswf= 0
 				in your .vimrc.
+				  default: 1
 
   *g:netrw_winsize*		specify initial size of new windows made with
 				"o" (see |netrw-o|), "v" (see |netrw-v|),
@@ -2553,6 +2650,9 @@ your browsing preferences.  (see also: |netrw-settings|)
 				 If g:netrw_winsize is less than zero, then
 				the absolute value of g:netrw_winsize lines
 				or columns will be used for the new window.
+				 If g:netrw_winsize is zero, then a normal
+				split will be made (ie. |'equalalways'| will
+				take effect, for example).
 				 default: 50  (for 50%)
 
   *g:netrw_xstrlen*		Controls how netrw computes string lengths,
@@ -2582,7 +2682,7 @@ Netrw has been designed to handle user options by saving them, setting the
 options to something that's compatible with netrw's needs, and then restoring
 them.  However, the autochdir option: >
 	:set acd
-is problematical.  Autochdir sets the current directory to that containing the
+is problematic.  Autochdir sets the current directory to that containing the
 file you edit; this apparently also applies to directories.  In other words,
 autochdir sets the current directory to that containing the "file" (even if
 that "file" is itself a directory).
@@ -2633,9 +2733,9 @@ Related topics:
 							*netrw-createfile*
 OPEN A NEW FILE IN NETRW'S CURRENT DIRECTORY		*netrw-%*
 
-To open a file in netrw's current directory, press "%".  This map will
-query the user for a new filename; an empty file by that name will be
-placed in the netrw's current directory (ie. b:netrw_curdir).
+To open a new file in netrw's current directory, press "%".  This map
+will query the user for a new filename; an empty file by that name will
+be placed in the netrw's current directory (ie. b:netrw_curdir).
 
 Related topics:               |netrw-d|
 
@@ -2661,6 +2761,9 @@ These will:
 	   will use only 30% of the columns available; the rest of the window
 	   is used for the preview window.
 
+Also see: |g:netrw_chgwin| |netrw-P|
+
+
 PREVIOUS WINDOW				*netrw-P* *netrw-prvwin* {{{2
 
 To edit a file or directory in the previously used (last accessed) window (see
@@ -2680,6 +2783,8 @@ Associated setting variables:
    |g:netrw_preview| control horizontal vs vertical splitting
    |g:netrw_winsize| control initial sizing
 
+Also see: |g:netrw_chgwin| |netrw-p|
+
 
 REFRESHING THE LISTING			*netrw-ctrl-l* *netrw-ctrl_l* {{{2
 
@@ -2717,6 +2822,7 @@ If there are marked files:  (see |netrw-mf|)
     Note that moving files is a dangerous operation; copies are safer.  That's
     because a "move" for remote files is actually a copy + delete -- and if
     the copy fails and the delete does not, you may lose the file.
+    Use at your own risk.
 
 The g:netrw_rename_cmd variable is used to implement renaming.  By default its
 value is:
@@ -2743,6 +2849,15 @@ One may select a netrw window for editing with the "C" mapping, or by setting
 g:netrw_chgwin to the selected window number.  Subsequent selection of a file
 to edit (|netrw-cr|) will use that window.
 
+	* C  by itself, will select the current window for editing via
+	  |netrw-cr|
+
+	* [count]C the count will be used as the window number to be used
+	  for editing via |netrw-cr|.
+Using >
+	let g:netrw_chgwin= -1
+will restore the default editing behavior (ie. use the current window).
+
 Related topics:			|netrw-cr| |g:netrw_browse_split|
 Associated setting variables:	|g:netrw_chgwin|
 
@@ -2830,7 +2945,7 @@ Associated setting variables:	|g:netrw_chgwin|
 
 		(taken from an answer provided by Wu Yongwei on the vim
 		mailing list)
-		I now see the problem. You code page is not 936, right? Vim
+		I now see the problem. Your code page is not 936, right? Vim
 		seems only able to open files with names that are valid in the
 		current code page, as are many other applications that do not
 		use the Unicode version of Windows APIs. This is an OS-related
@@ -3031,6 +3146,15 @@ Associated setting variables:	|g:netrw_chgwin|
 	     all netrw's mouse mappings, not just the <leftmouse> one.
 	     (see |g:netrw_mousemaps|)
 
+								*netrw-p16*
+	P16. When editing remote files (ex. :e ftp://hostname/path/file),
+	     under Windows I get an |E303| message complaining that its unable
+	     to open a swap file.
+
+	     (romainl) It looks like you are starting Vim from a protected
+	     directory.  Start if from your $HOME or another writable
+	     directory.
+
 ==============================================================================
 11. Debugging Netrw Itself				*netrw-debug* {{{1
 
@@ -3038,9 +3162,6 @@ The <netrw.vim> script is typically available as something like:
 >
 	/usr/local/share/vim/vim7x/plugin/netrwPlugin.vim
 	/usr/local/share/vim/vim7x/autoload/netrw.vim
-< -or- >
-	/usr/local/share/vim/vim6x/plugin/netrwPlugin.vim
-	/usr/local/share/vim/vim6x/autoload/netrw.vim
 <
 which is loaded automatically at startup (assuming :set nocp).
 
@@ -3050,9 +3171,7 @@ which is loaded automatically at startup (assuming :set nocp).
 	   or
 	     http://vim.sourceforge.net/scripts/script.php?script_id=120
 
-	  It now comes as a "vimball"; if you're using vim 7.0 or earlier,
-	  you'll need to update vimball, too.  See
-	     http://www.drchip.org/astronaut/vim/index.html#VIMBALL
+	  Decho.vim is provided as a "vimball"; see |vimball-intro|.
 
 	2. Edit the <netrw.vim> file by typing: >
 
@@ -3082,24 +3201,99 @@ which is loaded automatically at startup (assuming :set nocp).
 		:w! DBG
 
 <	   Furthermore, it'd be helpful if you would type >
-		:Dsep
-<	   after each command you issue, thereby making it easier to
-	   associate which part of the debugging trace is due to which
-	   command.
+		:Dsep <command>
+<	   where <command> is the command you're about to type next,
+	   thereby making it easier to associate which part of the
+	   debugging trace is due to which command.
 
-	   Please send that information to <netrw.vim>'s maintainer, >
+	   Please send that information to <netrw.vim>'s maintainer along
+	   with the o/s you're using and vim version you're using
+	   (see |:version|) >
 		NdrOchip at ScampbellPfamily.AbizM - NOSPAM
 <
 ==============================================================================
 12. History						*netrw-history* {{{1
 
+	v152:	Apr 08, 2014   	* uses the |'noswapfile'| option (requires
+				  vim 7.4 with patch 213)
+				* (Enno Nagel) turn |'rnu'| off in netrw
+				  buffers.
+				* (Quinn Strahl) suggested that netrw
+				  allow regular window splitting to occur,
+				  thereby allowing |'equalalways'| to take
+				  effect.
+				* (qingtian zhao) normally, netrw will
+				  save and restore the |'fileformat'|;
+				  however, sometimes that isn't wanted
+		Apr 14, 2014	* whenever netrw marks a buffer as ro,
+				  it will also mark it as nomod.
+		Apr 16, 2014	* sftp protocol now supported by
+				  netrw#Obtain(); this means that one
+				  may use "mc" to copy a remote file
+				  to a local file using sftp, and that
+				  the |netrw-O| command can obtain remote
+				  files via sftp.
+				* added [count]C support (see |netrw-C|)
+		Apr 18, 2014	* when |g:netrw_chgwin| is one more than
+				  the last window, then vertically split
+				  the last window and use it as the
+				  chgwin window.
+		May 09, 2014	* SavePosn was "saving filename under cursor"
+				  from a non-netrw window when using :Rex.
+	v151:	Jan 22, 2014	* extended :Rexplore to return to buffer
+				  prior to Explore or editing a directory
+				* (Ken Takata) netrw gave error when
+				  clipboard was disabled.  Sol'n: Placed
+				  several if has("clipboard") tests in.
+				* Fixed ftp://X@Y@Z// problem; X@Y now
+				  part of user id, and only Z is part of
+				  hostname.
+				* (A Loumiotis) reported that completion
+				  using a directory name containing spaces
+				  did not work.  Fixed with a retry in
+				  netrw#Explore() which removes the
+				  backslashes vim inserted.
+		Feb 26, 2014	* :Rexplore now records the current file
+				   using w:netrw_rexfile when returning via
+				  |:Rexplore|
+		Mar 08, 2014	* (David Kotchan) provided some patches
+				  allowing netrw to work properly with
+				  windows shares.
+				* Multiple one-liner help messages available
+				  by pressing <cr> while atop the "Quick
+				  Help" line
+				* worked on ShellCmdPost, FocusGained event
+				  handling.
+				* |:Lexplore| path: will be used to update
+				  a left-side netrw browsing directory.
+		Mar 12, 2014	* |:netrw-s-cr|: use <s-cr>  to close
+				  tree directory implemented
+		Mar 13, 2014	* (Tony Mechylynck) reported that using
+				  the browser with ftp on a directory,
+				  and selecting a gzipped txt file, that
+				  an E19 occurred (which was issued by
+				  gzip.vim).  Fixed.
+		Mar 14, 2014	* Implemented :MF and :MT (see |netrw-:MF|
+				  and |netrw-:MT|, respectively)
+		Mar 17, 2014	* |:Ntree| [dir] wasn't working properly; fixed
+		Mar 18, 2014	* Changed all uses of set to setl
+		Mar 18, 2014	* Commented the netrw_btkeep line in
+				  s:NetrwOptionSave(); the effect is that
+				  netrw buffers will remain as |'bt'|=nofile.
+				  This should prevent swapfiles being created
+				  for netrw buffers.
+		Mar 20, 2014	* Changed all uses of lcd to use s:NetrwLcd()
+				  instead.  Consistent error handling results
+				  and it also handles Window's shares
+				* Fixed |netrw-d| command when applied with ftp
+				* https: support included for netrw#NetRead()
 	v150:	Jul 12, 2013	* removed a "keepalt" to allow ":e #" to
 				  return to the netrw directory listing
 		Jul 13, 2013	* (Jonas Diemer) suggested changing
 				  a <cWORD> to <cfile>.
 		Jul 21, 2013	* (Yuri Kanivetsky) reported that netrw's
 				  use of mkdir did not produce directories
-				  following umask.
+				  following the user's umask.
 		Aug 27, 2013	* introduced |g:netrw_altfile| option
 		Sep 05, 2013	* s:Strlen() now uses |strdisplaywidth()|
 				  when available, by default

runtime/doc/quickfix.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quickfix.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Aug 03
+*quickfix.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Mar 27
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -202,8 +202,8 @@ command with 'l'.
 			the current window is used instead of the quickfix
 			list.
 
-							*:caddb* *:caddbuffer*
-:caddb[uffer] [bufnr]	Read the error list from the current buffer and add
+							*:cad* *:caddbuffer*
+:cad[dbuffer] [bufnr]	Read the error list from the current buffer and add
 			the errors to the current quickfix list.  If a
 			quickfix list is not present, then a new list is
 			created. Otherwise, same as ":cbuffer".
@@ -240,8 +240,8 @@ command with 'l'.
 :lgete[xpr] {expr}	Same as |:cgetexpr|, except the location list for the
 			current window is used instead of the quickfix list.
 
-							*:cad* *:caddexpr*
-:cad[dexpr] {expr}	Evaluate {expr} and add the resulting lines to the
+							*:cadde* *:caddexpr*
+:cadde[xpr] {expr}	Evaluate {expr} and add the resulting lines to the
 			current quickfix list. If a quickfix list is not
 			present, then a new list is created. The current
 			cursor position will not be changed. See |:cexpr| for
@@ -304,18 +304,23 @@ use this code: >
 
 					    *:cope* *:copen* *w:quickfix_title*
 :cope[n] [height]	Open a window to show the current list of errors.
+
 			When [height] is given, the window becomes that high
-			(if there is room).  Otherwise the window is made ten
-			lines high.
-			The window will contain a special buffer, with
-			'buftype' equal to "quickfix".  Don't change this!
+			(if there is room).  When [height] is omitted the
+			window is made ten lines high.
+
 			If there already is a quickfix window, it will be made
 			the current window.  It is not possible to open a
-			second quickfix window. The window will have the
-			w:quickfix_title variable set which will indicate the
-			command that produced the quickfix list. This can be
-			used to compose a custom status line if the value of
-			'statusline' is adjusted properly.
+			second quickfix window.  If [height] is given the
+			existing window will be resized to it.
+
+			The window will contain a special buffer, with
+			'buftype' equal to "quickfix".  Don't change this!
+			The window will have the w:quickfix_title variable set
+			which will indicate the command that produced the
+			quickfix list. This can be used to compose a custom
+			status line if the value of 'statusline' is adjusted
+			properly.
 
 							*:lop* *:lopen*
 :lop[en] [height]	Open a window to show the location list for the
@@ -838,7 +843,7 @@ Unfortunately, there is no standard way to run the tests.
 The alltests.py script seems to be used quite often, that's all.
 Useful values for the 'makeprg' options therefore are:
  setlocal makeprg=./alltests.py " Run a testsuite
- setlocal makeprg=python %      " Run a single testcase
+ setlocal makeprg=python\ %:S   " Run a single testcase
 
 Also see http://vim.sourceforge.net/tip_view.php?tip_id=280.
 
@@ -1332,7 +1337,7 @@ or: >
 Here is an alternative from Michael F. Lamb for Unix that filters the errors
 first: >
   :setl errorformat=%Z%f:%l:\ %m,%A%p^,%-G%*[^sl]%.%#
-  :setl makeprg=javac\ %\ 2>&1\ \\\|\ vim-javac-filter
+  :setl makeprg=javac\ %:S\ 2>&1\ \\\|\ vim-javac-filter
 
 You need to put the following in "vim-javac-filter" somewhere in your path
 (e.g., in ~/bin) and make it executable: >

runtime/doc/quickref.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quickref.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Jun 29
+*quickref.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Aug 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -624,6 +624,8 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'bioskey'	  'biosk'   MS-DOS: use bios calls for input characters
 'bomb'			    prepend a Byte Order Mark to the file
 'breakat'	  'brk'     characters that may cause a line break
+'breakindent'	  'bri'     wrapped line repeats indent 
+'breakindentopt'  'briopt'  settings for 'breakindent'
 'browsedir'	  'bsdir'   which directory to start browsing in
 'bufhidden'	  'bh'	    what to do when buffer is no longer in window
 'buflisted'	  'bl'	    whether the buffer shows up in the buffer list
@@ -829,6 +831,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'regexpengine'	  're'	    default regexp engine to use
 'relativenumber'  'rnu'	    show relative line number in front of each line
 'remap'			    allow mappings to work recursively
+'renderoptions'	  'rop'	    options for text rendering on Windows
 'report'		    threshold for reporting nr. of lines changed
 'restorescreen'   'rs'	    Win32: restore screen when exiting
 'revins'	  'ri'	    inserting characters will work backwards

runtime/doc/recover.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*recover.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2010 Jul 20
+*recover.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Mar 27
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -81,7 +81,14 @@ the amount of memory used to be higher than given with 'maxmem' or
 'maxmemtot'.  And when making a change to a read-only file, the swap file is
 created anyway.
 
-The 'swapfile' option can be reset to avoid creating a swapfile.
+The 'swapfile' option can be reset to avoid creating a swapfile.  And the
+|:noswapfile| modifier can be used to not create a swapfile for a new buffer.
+
+:nos[wapfile]   {command}			*:nos* *:noswapfile*
+		Execute {command}. If it contains a command that loads a new
+		buffer, it will be loaded without creating a swapfile and the
+		'swapfile' option will be reset.  If a buffer already had a
+		swapfile it is not removed and 'swapfile' is not reset.
 
 
 Detecting an existing swap file ~

runtime/doc/repeat.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Jul 25
+*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Mar 25
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -26,10 +26,14 @@ Chapter 26 of the user manual introduces repeating |usr_26.txt|.
 
 Simple changes can be repeated with the "." command.  Without a count, the
 count of the last change is used.  If you enter a count, it will replace the
-last one.  If the last change included a specification of a numbered register,
-the register number will be incremented.  See |redo-register| for an example
-how to use this.  Note that when repeating a command that used a Visual
-selection, the same SIZE of area is used, see |visual-repeat|.
+last one.  |v:count| and |v:count1| will be set.
+
+If the last change included a specification of a numbered register, the
+register number will be incremented.  See |redo-register| for an example how
+to use this.
+
+Note that when repeating a command that used a Visual selection, the same SIZE
+of area is used, see |visual-repeat|.
 
 							*@:*
 @:			Repeat last command-line [count] times.
@@ -584,6 +588,12 @@ the |+reltime| feature, which is present more often.
 
 For profiling syntax highlighting see |:syntime|.
 
+For example, to profile the one_script.vim script file: >
+	:profile start /tmp/one_script_profile
+	:profile file one_script.vim
+	:source one_script.vim
+	:exit
+
 
 :prof[ile] start {fname}			*:prof* *:profile* *E750*
 		Start profiling, write the output in {fname} upon exit.
@@ -608,8 +618,10 @@ For profiling syntax highlighting see |:syntime|.
 		This only profiles the script itself, not the functions
 		defined in it.
 		When the [!] is added then all functions defined in the script
-		will also be profiled.  But only if the script is loaded after
-		this command.
+		will also be profiled.
+		Note that profiling only starts when the script is loaded
+		after this command.  A :profile command in the script itself
+		won't work.
 
 
 :profd[el] ...						*:profd* *:profdel*

runtime/doc/sign.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*sign.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Nov 17
+*sign.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 May 07
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Gordon Prieur
@@ -137,6 +137,7 @@ PLACING SIGNS						*:sign-place* *E158*
 :sign place {id} line={lnum} name={name} buffer={nr}
 		Same, but use buffer {nr}.
 
+							*E885*
 :sign place {id} name={name} file={fname}
 		Change the placed sign {id} in file {fname} to use the defined
 		sign {name}.  See remark above about {fname} |:sign-fname|.

runtime/doc/spell.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*spell.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Nov 12
+*spell.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Jul 02
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -939,9 +939,10 @@ be combined without errors.
 
 If you get an E763 warning that the word tables differ you need to update your
 ".spl" spell files.  If you downloaded the files, get the latest version of
-all spell files you use.  Otherwise generate the .spl file again with
-|:mkspell|.  If you still get errors check the FOL, LOW and UPP lines in the
-used .aff files.
+all spell files you use.  If you are only using one, e.g., German, then also
+download the recent English spell files.  Otherwise generate the .spl file
+again with |:mkspell|.  If you still get errors check the FOL, LOW and UPP
+lines in the used .aff files.
 
 The XX.ascii.spl spell file generated with the "-ascii" argument will not
 contain the table with characters, so that it can be combine with spell files

runtime/doc/starting.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*starting.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Jul 20
+*starting.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Jul 09
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -167,7 +167,10 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 							*-+/*
 +/{pat}		The cursor will be positioned on the first line containing
 		"pat" in the first file being edited (see |pattern| for the
-		available search patterns).
+		available search patterns).  The search starts at the cursor
+		position, which can be the first line or the cursor position
+		last used from |viminfo|. To force a search from the first
+		line use "+1 +/pat".
 
 +{command}						*-+c* *-c*
 -c {command}	{command} will be executed after the first file has been
@@ -1276,8 +1279,10 @@ triggered.
 			When [!] is included an existing file is overwritten.
 			When [file] is omitted or is a number from 1 to 9, a
 			name is generated and 'viewdir' prepended.  When the
-			last directory name in 'viewdir' does not exist, this
-			directory is created.
+			last path part of 'viewdir' does not exist, this
+			directory is created.  E.g., when 'viewdir' is
+			"$VIM/vimfiles/view" then "view" is created in
+			"$VIM/vimfiles".
 			An existing file is always overwritten then.  Use
 			|:loadview| to load this view again.
 			When [file] is the name of a file ('viewdir' is not
@@ -1501,7 +1506,7 @@ most of the information will be restored).
 			already set (registers, marks, |v:oldfiles|, etc.)
 			will be overwritten   {not in Vi}
 
-					*:wv* *:wviminfo* *E137* *E138* *E574*
+				*:wv* *:wviminfo* *E137* *E138* *E574* *E886*
 :wv[iminfo][!] [file]	Write to viminfo file [file] (default: see above).
 			The information in the file is first read in to make
 			a merge between old and new info.  When [!] is used,

runtime/doc/syntax.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Aug 22
+*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Jun 27
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -1022,6 +1022,21 @@ Or to avoid the highlighting: >
 This works immediately.
 
 
+CLOJURE							*ft-clojure-syntax*
+
+Setting *g:clojure_fold* enables folding Clojure code via the syntax engine.
+Any list, vector, or map that extends over more than one line can be folded
+using the standard Vim |fold-commands|.
+
+Please note that this option does not work with scripts that redefine the
+bracket syntax regions, such as rainbow-parentheses plugins.
+
+This option is off by default.
+>
+	" Default
+	let g:clojure_fold = 0
+<
+
 COBOL						*cobol.vim* *ft-cobol-syntax*
 
 COBOL highlighting has different needs for legacy code than it does for fresh
@@ -1281,6 +1296,32 @@ Finally, some vendors support hexadecimal constants.  To handle them, add >
 to your startup file.
 
 
+EUPHORIA	    *euphoria3.vim* *euphoria4.vim* *ft-euphoria-syntax*
+
+Two syntax highlighting files exists for Euphoria. One for Euphoria 
+version 3.1.1, which is the default syntax highlighting file, and one for 
+Euphoria version 4.0.5 or later.
+
+Euphoria version 3.1.1 (http://www.rapideuphoria.com/) is still necessary 
+for developing applications for the DOS platform, which Euphoria version 4 
+(http://www.openeuphoria.org/) does not support.
+
+The following file extensions are auto-detected as Euphoria file type: 
+    
+	*.e, *.eu, *.ew, *.ex, *.exu, *.exw
+	*.E, *.EU, *.EW, *.EX, *.EXU, *.EXW
+
+To select syntax highlighting file for Euphoria, as well as for 
+auto-detecting the *.e and *.E file extensions as Euphoria file type,
+add the following line to your startup file: >
+
+	:let filetype_euphoria="euphoria3"
+
+	or 
+
+	:let filetype_euphoria="euphoria4"
+
+
 ERLANG						*erlang.vim* *ft-erlang-syntax*
 
 Erlang is a functional programming language developed by Ericsson.  Files with
@@ -1647,7 +1688,7 @@ vimrc file: >
 HTML comments are rather special (see an HTML reference document for the
 details), and the syntax coloring scheme will highlight all errors.
 However, if you prefer to use the wrong style (starts with <!-- and
-ends with --!>) you can define >
+ends with -->) you can define >
 	:let html_wrong_comments=1
 
 JavaScript and Visual Basic embedded inside HTML documents are highlighted as
@@ -1918,7 +1959,7 @@ If you don't want to set the variable, use the modeline in EVERY LPC file.
 There are several implementations for LPC, we intend to support most widely
 used ones.  Here the default LPC syntax is for MudOS series, for MudOS v22
 and before, you should turn off the sensible modifiers, and this will also
-asserts the new efuns after v22 to be invalid, don't set this variable when
+assert the new efuns after v22 to be invalid, don't set this variable when
 you are using the latest version of MudOS: >
 
 	:let lpc_pre_v22 = 1
@@ -2238,7 +2279,7 @@ files, you may set the 'perl_include_pod' option to 0: >
 
 	:let perl_include_pod = 0
 
-The reduce the complexity of parsing (and increase performance) you can switch
+To reduce the complexity of parsing (and increase performance) you can switch
 off two elements in the parsing of variable names and contents. >
 
 To handle package references in variable and function names not differently

runtime/doc/tags

@@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 %	motion.txt	/*%*
 %:.	cmdline.txt	/*%:.*
 %:8	cmdline.txt	/*%:8*
+%:S	cmdline.txt	/*%:S*
 %:e	cmdline.txt	/*%:e*
 %:gs	cmdline.txt	/*%:gs*
 %:h	cmdline.txt	/*%:h*
@@ -90,6 +91,10 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'bl'	options.txt	/*'bl'*
 'bomb'	options.txt	/*'bomb'*
 'breakat'	options.txt	/*'breakat'*
+'breakindent'	options.txt	/*'breakindent'*
+'breakindentopt'	options.txt	/*'breakindentopt'*
+'bri'	options.txt	/*'bri'*
+'briopt'	options.txt	/*'briopt'*
 'brk'	options.txt	/*'brk'*
 'browsedir'	options.txt	/*'browsedir'*
 'bs'	options.txt	/*'bs'*
@@ -751,6 +756,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'regexpengine'	options.txt	/*'regexpengine'*
 'relativenumber'	options.txt	/*'relativenumber'*
 'remap'	options.txt	/*'remap'*
+'renderoptions'	options.txt	/*'renderoptions'*
 'report'	options.txt	/*'report'*
 'restorescreen'	options.txt	/*'restorescreen'*
 'revins'	options.txt	/*'revins'*
@@ -761,6 +767,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'rlc'	options.txt	/*'rlc'*
 'rnu'	options.txt	/*'rnu'*
 'ro'	options.txt	/*'ro'*
+'rop'	options.txt	/*'rop'*
 'rs'	options.txt	/*'rs'*
 'rtp'	options.txt	/*'rtp'*
 'ru'	options.txt	/*'ru'*
@@ -1166,6 +1173,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 +dialog_gui	various.txt	/*+dialog_gui*
 +diff	various.txt	/*+diff*
 +digraphs	various.txt	/*+digraphs*
++directx	various.txt	/*+directx*
 +dnd	various.txt	/*+dnd*
 +emacs_tags	various.txt	/*+emacs_tags*
 +eval	various.txt	/*+eval*
@@ -1200,6 +1208,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 +mouse	various.txt	/*+mouse*
 +mouse_dec	various.txt	/*+mouse_dec*
 +mouse_gpm	various.txt	/*+mouse_gpm*
++mouse_jsbterm	various.txt	/*+mouse_jsbterm*
 +mouse_netterm	various.txt	/*+mouse_netterm*
 +mouse_pterm	various.txt	/*+mouse_pterm*
 +mouse_sgr	various.txt	/*+mouse_sgr*
@@ -1414,6 +1423,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 /\%>c	pattern.txt	/*\/\\%>c*
 /\%>l	pattern.txt	/*\/\\%>l*
 /\%>v	pattern.txt	/*\/\\%>v*
+/\%C	pattern.txt	/*\/\\%C*
 /\%U	pattern.txt	/*\/\\%U*
 /\%V	pattern.txt	/*\/\\%V*
 /\%[]	pattern.txt	/*\/\\%[]*
@@ -1788,6 +1798,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :3match	pattern.txt	/*:3match*
 ::.	cmdline.txt	/*::.*
 ::8	cmdline.txt	/*::8*
+::S	cmdline.txt	/*::S*
 ::e	cmdline.txt	/*::e*
 ::gs	cmdline.txt	/*::gs*
 ::h	cmdline.txt	/*::h*
@@ -1971,8 +1982,8 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :cabc	map.txt	/*:cabc*
 :cabclear	map.txt	/*:cabclear*
 :cad	quickfix.txt	/*:cad*
-:caddb	quickfix.txt	/*:caddb*
 :caddbuffer	quickfix.txt	/*:caddbuffer*
+:cadde	quickfix.txt	/*:cadde*
 :caddexpr	quickfix.txt	/*:caddexpr*
 :caddf	quickfix.txt	/*:caddf*
 :caddfile	quickfix.txt	/*:caddfile*
@@ -2498,6 +2509,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :nbkey	netbeans.txt	/*:nbkey*
 :nbstart	netbeans.txt	/*:nbstart*
 :ne	editing.txt	/*:ne*
+:netrw-s-cr	pi_netrw.txt	/*:netrw-s-cr*
 :new	windows.txt	/*:new*
 :next	editing.txt	/*:next*
 :next_f	editing.txt	/*:next_f*
@@ -2518,8 +2530,11 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :noautocmd	autocmd.txt	/*:noautocmd*
 :noh	pattern.txt	/*:noh*
 :nohlsearch	pattern.txt	/*:nohlsearch*
+:nor	map.txt	/*:nor*
+:nore	map.txt	/*:nore*
 :norea	map.txt	/*:norea*
 :noreabbrev	map.txt	/*:noreabbrev*
+:norem	map.txt	/*:norem*
 :noremap	map.txt	/*:noremap*
 :noremap!	map.txt	/*:noremap!*
 :noreme	gui.txt	/*:noreme*
@@ -2527,6 +2542,8 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :norm	various.txt	/*:norm*
 :normal	various.txt	/*:normal*
 :normal-range	various.txt	/*:normal-range*
+:nos	recover.txt	/*:nos*
+:noswapfile	recover.txt	/*:noswapfile*
 :nu	various.txt	/*:nu*
 :number	various.txt	/*:number*
 :nun	map.txt	/*:nun*
@@ -2673,7 +2690,6 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :rviminfo	starting.txt	/*:rviminfo*
 :s	change.txt	/*:s*
 :s%	change.txt	/*:s%*
-:s/\=	change.txt	/*:s\/\\=*
 :sN	windows.txt	/*:sN*
 :sNext	windows.txt	/*:sNext*
 :s\=	change.txt	/*:s\\=*
@@ -3579,7 +3595,7 @@ E201	autocmd.txt	/*E201*
 E202	options.txt	/*E202*
 E203	autocmd.txt	/*E203*
 E204	autocmd.txt	/*E204*
-E205	if_pyth.txt	/*E205*
+E205	options.txt	/*E205*
 E206	options.txt	/*E206*
 E207	editing.txt	/*E207*
 E208	message.txt	/*E208*
@@ -4305,6 +4321,13 @@ E878	pattern.txt	/*E878*
 E879	syntax.txt	/*E879*
 E88	windows.txt	/*E88*
 E880	if_pyth.txt	/*E880*
+E881	autocmd.txt	/*E881*
+E882	eval.txt	/*E882*
+E883	eval.txt	/*E883*
+E884	eval.txt	/*E884*
+E885	sign.txt	/*E885*
+E886	starting.txt	/*E886*
+E887	if_pyth.txt	/*E887*
 E89	message.txt	/*E89*
 E90	message.txt	/*E90*
 E91	options.txt	/*E91*
@@ -4434,6 +4457,13 @@ Operator-pending-mode	intro.txt	/*Operator-pending-mode*
 OverTheSpot	mbyte.txt	/*OverTheSpot*
 P	change.txt	/*P*
 PATHEXT	eval.txt	/*PATHEXT*
+PHP_BracesAtCodeLevel	indent.txt	/*PHP_BracesAtCodeLevel*
+PHP_autoformatcomment	indent.txt	/*PHP_autoformatcomment*
+PHP_default_indenting	indent.txt	/*PHP_default_indenting*
+PHP_outdentSLComments	indent.txt	/*PHP_outdentSLComments*
+PHP_outdentphpescape	indent.txt	/*PHP_outdentphpescape*
+PHP_removeCRwhenUnix	indent.txt	/*PHP_removeCRwhenUnix*
+PHP_vintage_case_default_indent	indent.txt	/*PHP_vintage_case_default_indent*
 Pattern	pattern.txt	/*Pattern*
 Perl	if_perl.txt	/*Perl*
 Posix	intro.txt	/*Posix*
@@ -4777,6 +4807,7 @@ argidx()	eval.txt	/*argidx()*
 arglist	editing.txt	/*arglist*
 arglist-position	editing.txt	/*arglist-position*
 arglist-quit	usr_07.txt	/*arglist-quit*
+arglistid()	eval.txt	/*arglistid()*
 argument-list	editing.txt	/*argument-list*
 argv()	eval.txt	/*argv()*
 as	motion.txt	/*as*
@@ -4874,6 +4905,7 @@ blockwise-operators	visual.txt	/*blockwise-operators*
 blockwise-register	change.txt	/*blockwise-register*
 blockwise-visual	visual.txt	/*blockwise-visual*
 blowfish	options.txt	/*blowfish*
+blowfish2	options.txt	/*blowfish2*
 bold	syntax.txt	/*bold*
 bom-bytes	mbyte.txt	/*bom-bytes*
 book	intro.txt	/*book*
@@ -5362,6 +5394,7 @@ diW	motion.txt	/*diW*
 dialog	gui_w32.txt	/*dialog*
 dialogs-added	version5.txt	/*dialogs-added*
 dib	motion.txt	/*dib*
+dict	eval.txt	/*dict*
 dict-functions	usr_41.txt	/*dict-functions*
 dict-identity	eval.txt	/*dict-identity*
 dict-modification	eval.txt	/*dict-modification*
@@ -5470,6 +5503,8 @@ errors	message.txt	/*errors*
 escape	intro.txt	/*escape*
 escape()	eval.txt	/*escape()*
 escape-bar	version4.txt	/*escape-bar*
+euphoria3.vim	syntax.txt	/*euphoria3.vim*
+euphoria4.vim	syntax.txt	/*euphoria4.vim*
 eval	eval.txt	/*eval*
 eval()	eval.txt	/*eval()*
 eval-examples	eval.txt	/*eval-examples*
@@ -5504,6 +5539,7 @@ exclusive	motion.txt	/*exclusive*
 exclusive-linewise	motion.txt	/*exclusive-linewise*
 executable()	eval.txt	/*executable()*
 execute-menus	gui.txt	/*execute-menus*
+exepath()	eval.txt	/*exepath()*
 exim	starting.txt	/*exim*
 exists()	eval.txt	/*exists()*
 exp()	eval.txt	/*exp()*
@@ -5720,6 +5756,7 @@ ft-changelog-plugin	filetype.txt	/*ft-changelog-plugin*
 ft-changelog-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-changelog-syntax*
 ft-chill-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-chill-syntax*
 ft-clojure-indent	indent.txt	/*ft-clojure-indent*
+ft-clojure-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-clojure-syntax*
 ft-cobol-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-cobol-syntax*
 ft-coldfusion-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-coldfusion-syntax*
 ft-cpp-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-cpp-syntax*
@@ -5736,6 +5773,7 @@ ft-dosbatch-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-dosbatch-syntax*
 ft-dtd-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-dtd-syntax*
 ft-eiffel-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-eiffel-syntax*
 ft-erlang-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-erlang-syntax*
+ft-euphoria-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-euphoria-syntax*
 ft-flexwiki-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-flexwiki-syntax*
 ft-form-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-form-syntax*
 ft-fortran-indent	indent.txt	/*ft-fortran-indent*
@@ -5889,6 +5927,7 @@ g:ada_with_gnat_project_files	ft_ada.txt	/*g:ada_with_gnat_project_files*
 g:ada_withuse_ordinary	ft_ada.txt	/*g:ada_withuse_ordinary*
 g:clojure_align_multiline_strings	indent.txt	/*g:clojure_align_multiline_strings*
 g:clojure_align_subforms	indent.txt	/*g:clojure_align_subforms*
+g:clojure_fold	syntax.txt	/*g:clojure_fold*
 g:clojure_fuzzy_indent	indent.txt	/*g:clojure_fuzzy_indent*
 g:clojure_fuzzy_indent_blacklist	indent.txt	/*g:clojure_fuzzy_indent_blacklist*
 g:clojure_fuzzy_indent_patterns	indent.txt	/*g:clojure_fuzzy_indent_patterns*
@@ -5958,6 +5997,7 @@ g:netrw_dynamic_maxfilenamelen	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_dynamic_maxfilenamelen*
 g:netrw_errorlvl	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_errorlvl*
 g:netrw_fastbrowse	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_fastbrowse*
 g:netrw_fetch_cmd	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_fetch_cmd*
+g:netrw_ffkeep	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_ffkeep*
 g:netrw_fname_escape	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_fname_escape*
 g:netrw_ftp	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_ftp*
 g:netrw_ftp_browse_reject	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_ftp_browse_reject*
@@ -6102,6 +6142,8 @@ getcharmod()	eval.txt	/*getcharmod()*
 getcmdline()	eval.txt	/*getcmdline()*
 getcmdpos()	eval.txt	/*getcmdpos()*
 getcmdtype()	eval.txt	/*getcmdtype()*
+getcmdwintype()	eval.txt	/*getcmdwintype()*
+getcurpos()	eval.txt	/*getcurpos()*
 getcwd()	eval.txt	/*getcwd()*
 getfontname()	eval.txt	/*getfontname()*
 getfperm()	eval.txt	/*getfperm()*
@@ -6685,6 +6727,7 @@ linewise-register	change.txt	/*linewise-register*
 linewise-visual	visual.txt	/*linewise-visual*
 lisp.vim	syntax.txt	/*lisp.vim*
 lispindent()	eval.txt	/*lispindent()*
+list	eval.txt	/*list*
 list-functions	usr_41.txt	/*list-functions*
 list-identity	eval.txt	/*list-identity*
 list-index	eval.txt	/*list-index*
@@ -6796,6 +6839,7 @@ match()	eval.txt	/*match()*
 match-highlight	pattern.txt	/*match-highlight*
 match-parens	tips.txt	/*match-parens*
 matchadd()	eval.txt	/*matchadd()*
+matchaddpos()	eval.txt	/*matchaddpos()*
 matcharg()	eval.txt	/*matcharg()*
 matchdelete()	eval.txt	/*matchdelete()*
 matchend()	eval.txt	/*matchend()*
@@ -6937,6 +6981,15 @@ netreadfixup	pi_netrw.txt	/*netreadfixup*
 netrw	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw*
 netrw-%	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-%*
 netrw--	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw--*
+netrw-:Explore	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-:Explore*
+netrw-:Hexplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-:Hexplore*
+netrw-:Lexplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-:Lexplore*
+netrw-:MF	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-:MF*
+netrw-:MT	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-:MT*
+netrw-:Rexplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-:Rexplore*
+netrw-:Sexplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-:Sexplore*
+netrw-:Texplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-:Texplore*
+netrw-:Vexplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-:Vexplore*
 netrw-C	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-C*
 netrw-D	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-D*
 netrw-O	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-O*
@@ -7052,6 +7105,7 @@ netrw-p12	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-p12*
 netrw-p13	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-p13*
 netrw-p14	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-p14*
 netrw-p15	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-p15*
+netrw-p16	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-p16*
 netrw-p2	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-p2*
 netrw-p3	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-p3*
 netrw-p4	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-p4*
@@ -7393,6 +7447,7 @@ profile	repeat.txt	/*profile*
 profiling	repeat.txt	/*profiling*
 profiling-variable	eval.txt	/*profiling-variable*
 progname-variable	eval.txt	/*progname-variable*
+progpath-variable	eval.txt	/*progpath-variable*
 progress.vim	syntax.txt	/*progress.vim*
 pronounce	intro.txt	/*pronounce*
 psql	ft_sql.txt	/*psql*
@@ -7596,6 +7651,7 @@ s/\2	change.txt	/*s\/\\2*
 s/\3	change.txt	/*s\/\\3*
 s/\9	change.txt	/*s\/\\9*
 s/\<CR>	change.txt	/*s\/\\<CR>*
+s/\=	change.txt	/*s\/\\=*
 s/\E	change.txt	/*s\/\\E*
 s/\L	change.txt	/*s\/\\L*
 s/\U	change.txt	/*s\/\\U*
@@ -7892,6 +7948,7 @@ strcspn()	eval.txt	/*strcspn()*
 strdisplaywidth()	eval.txt	/*strdisplaywidth()*
 strftime()	eval.txt	/*strftime()*
 stridx()	eval.txt	/*stridx()*
+string	eval.txt	/*string*
 string()	eval.txt	/*string()*
 string-functions	usr_41.txt	/*string-functions*
 string-match	eval.txt	/*string-match*
@@ -7956,6 +8013,7 @@ sysmouse	term.txt	/*sysmouse*
 system()	eval.txt	/*system()*
 system-functions	usr_41.txt	/*system-functions*
 system-vimrc	starting.txt	/*system-vimrc*
+systemlist()	eval.txt	/*systemlist()*
 s~	change.txt	/*s~*
 t	motion.txt	/*t*
 t:	eval.txt	/*t:*
@@ -8300,6 +8358,7 @@ undo_ftplugin	usr_41.txt	/*undo_ftplugin*
 undofile()	eval.txt	/*undofile()*
 undotree()	eval.txt	/*undotree()*
 unicode	mbyte.txt	/*unicode*
+uniq()	eval.txt	/*uniq()*
 unix	os_unix.txt	/*unix*
 unlisted-buffer	windows.txt	/*unlisted-buffer*
 up-down-motions	motion.txt	/*up-down-motions*
@@ -8398,6 +8457,7 @@ v:operator	eval.txt	/*v:operator*
 v:prevcount	eval.txt	/*v:prevcount*
 v:profiling	eval.txt	/*v:profiling*
 v:progname	eval.txt	/*v:progname*
+v:progpath	eval.txt	/*v:progpath*
 v:register	eval.txt	/*v:register*
 v:scrollstart	eval.txt	/*v:scrollstart*
 v:searchforward	eval.txt	/*v:searchforward*

runtime/doc/term.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*term.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Mar 13
+*term.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 May 13
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -666,8 +666,8 @@ When the X-server clipboard is available, the command server described in
 
 							*xterm-copy-paste*
 NOTE: In some (older) xterms, it's not possible to move the cursor past column
-95.  This is an xterm problem, not Vim's.  Get a newer xterm |color-xterm|.
-Now the limit is 223 columns.
+95 or 223.  This is an xterm problem, not Vim's.  Get a newer xterm
+|color-xterm|.  Also see |'ttymouse'|.
 
 Copy/paste in xterm with (current mode NOT included in 'mouse'):
 1. Press left mouse button on first letter of text, move mouse pointer to last

runtime/doc/todo.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*todo.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Jan 23
+*todo.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Aug 22
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -35,109 +35,221 @@ not be repeated below, unless there is extra information.
 -------------------- Known bugs and current work -----------------------
 
 Regexp problems:
-- After patch 7.4.045 pattern with \zs isn't handled correctly. (Yukihiro
-  Nakadaira, 2013 Dec 23)  Patch 2014 Jan 15, update Jan 16.
-- NFA regexp doesn't count tab matches correctly. (Urtica Dioica / gaultheria
-  Shallon, 2013 Nov 18)
-- After patch 7.4.100 there is still a difference between NFA and old engine.
-  25 a's with pattern \v^(aa+)\1+$  (Urtica Dioica, 2013 Nov 21) Also: 9 a's
-  with pattern  \v^(a{-2,})\1+$ (Nov 23)
-- NFA engine combining character mismatch. (glts, 2013 Aug 27)
-  Remark from Dominique, Aug 27
+- Bug with pattern: '\vblock (\d+)\.\n.*\d+%(\1)@<!\.$'
+  (Lech Lorens, 2014 Feb 3)
 - Issue 164: freeze on regexp search.
-- NFA problem with non-greedy match and branches. (Ingo Karkat, 2013 Nov 29)
 - Ignorecase not handled properly for multi-byte characters. (Axel Bender,
   2013 Dec 11)
 - Using \@> and \?. (Brett Stahlman, 2013 Dec 21) Remark from Marcin Szamotulski
   Remark from Brett 2014 Jan 6 and 7.
+- Bug when using \>. (Ramel, 2014 Feb 2) (Aaron Bohannon, 2014 Feb 13)
+- NFA regexp doesn't handle \%<v correctly. (Ingo Karkat, 2014 May 12)
+- Does not work with NFA regexp engine:
+  \%u, \%x, \%o, \%d followed by a composing character
+- Bug relating to back references. (Ingo Karkat, 2014 Jul 24)
+- Using back reference before the capturing group sometimes works with the old
+  engine, can we do this with the new engine?  E.g. with
+  "/\%(<\1>\)\@<=.*\%(<\/\(\w\+\)>\)\@=" matching text inside HTML tags.
 
-Patch to fix endless loop in completion. (Christian Brabandt, 2014 Jan 15)
+Still using freed memory after using setloclist(). (lcd, 2014 Jul 23)
+More info Jul 24.  Not clear why.
 
-Patch after 7.4.154: no autoload when not evaluating. (Yasuhiro Matsumoto,
-2014 Jan 14)
+Patch for:
+    CmdUndefined    - Like FuncUndefined but for user commands.
+Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2014 Aug 18
 
-Test for patch 7.4.149. (Yukihiro Nakadaira, 2014 Jan 15)
+Patch to make getregtype() return the right size for non-linux systems.
+(Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2014 Jul 8)
+Breaks test_eval.  Inefficient, can we only compute y_width when needed?
+
+Patch to fix a problem with breakindent. (Christian Brabandt, 2014 Aug 17)
+It's actually not a breakindent problem. With test: Aug 19.
+With renamed test: Aug 20
 
 Problem that a previous silent ":throw" causes a following try/catch not to
 work. (ZyX, 2013 Sep 28)
 
+ml_get error when using Python, issue 248.
+
+Patch to fix typos in help files. (Dominique, 2014 Aug 9)
+
+Way to reproduce problem that characters are put on the screen twice in Insert
+mode when using system(). (Jacob Niehus, 2014 Aug 9)
+Related to setting TMODE_COOK.  Perhaps we can omit that for system()?
+
+Update for Romanian spell file. (Vanilla Ice, 2014 Aug 13)
+
+Patch to remove ETO_IGNORELANGUAGE, it causes Chinese characters not to show
+up. (Paul Moore, 2014 Jul 30)
+Should it depend on the Windows version?  Waiting for feedback.
+No longer needed after including DirectX patch?
+
+Patch by Marcin Szamotulski to add count to :close (2014 Aug 10, update Aug
+14)
+    Make ":1close" close the first window.
+    Make ":+1close" close the next window.
+    Make ":-1close" close the previous window.
+Can't easily close the help window, like ":pc" closes the preview window and
+":ccl" closes the quickfix window.  Add ":hclose". (Chris Gaal)
+Patch for :helpclose, Christian Brabandt, 2010 Sep 6.
+
+Patch by Marcin Szamotulski to add +cmd to buffer commands.
+(2014 Aug 18)
+
+Patch to fix that system() with empty input fails. (Olaf Dabrunz, 2014 Aug 19)
+
+When using a visual selection of multiple words and doing CTRL-W_] it jumps to
+the tag matching the word under the cursor, not the selected text.
+(Patrick hemmer)
+Patch by Christian, 2014 Aug 8.
+
+Completion for :buf does not use 'wildignorecase'. (Akshay H, 2014 May 31)
+
+Patch to handle list with some items locked. (ZyX, 2014 Aug 17)
+Prefer the second solution.
+
 ":cd C:\Windows\System32\drivers\etc*" does not work, even though the
 directory exists. (Sergio Gallelli, 2013 Dec 29)
 
-Blowfish is actually using CFB instead of OFB.  Adjust names in blowfish.c.
+Patch to add a special key name for K_CURSORHOLD. (Hirohito Higashi, 2014 Aug
+10)
 
-More compiler warnings for Python. (Tony Mechelynck, 2014 Jan 14)
-
-Patch to fix that when wide functions fail the non-wide function may do
-something wrong. (Ken Takata, 2014 Jan 18)
-
-Patch 7.4.085 breaks Visual insert in some situations. (Issue 193)
-Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2014 Jan 16.
+The entries added by matchaddpos() are returned by getmatches() but can't be
+set with setmatches(). (lcd47, 2014 Jun 29)
 
 Problem using ":try" inside ":execute". (ZyX, 2013 Sep 15)
 
-Update for Clojure ftplugin. (Sung Pae).  Await discussion about formatting in
-ftplugins.
-
 Python: ":py raw_input('prompt')" doesn't work. (Manu Hack)
 
-Patch to make Dictionary.update() work without arguments.
-(ZyX, 2013 Oct 19)
+Value returned by virtcol() changes depending on how lines wrap.  This is
+inconsistant with the documentation.
 
-Include systemverilog file?  Two votes yes.
-
-Patch to make "J" set '[ and '] marks. (Christian Brabandt, 2013 Dec 11)
-Any compatibility problems?
-
-Patch to add :S modifier for excaping the current file name.
-(ZyX, 2013 Nov 30)  Update Dec 5.
-
-Problem with 'spellsuggest' file, only works for some words.
-(Cesar Romani, 2013 Aug 20)  Depends on file name? (Aug 24)
-Additional remark by glts: the suggested words are marked bad?
-
-8   non-ASCII font names don't work.  Need to convert from 'encoding' and use
-    the wide functions. Patch by Ken Takata, 2013 Dec 22.
-    Update 2014 Jan 6.
+MS-Windows: Crash opening very long file name starting with "\\".
+(Christian Brock, 2012 Jun 29)
 
 Syntax highlighting slow (hangs) in SASS file. (Niek Bosch, 2013 Aug 21)
 
 Adding "~" to 'cdpath' doesn't work for completion?  (Davido, 2013 Aug 19)
 
-Error number E834 is used twice. (Yukihiro Nakadaira. 2014 Jan 18)
+"hi link" does not respect groups with GUI settings only. (Mark Lodato, 2014
+Jun 8)
 
-Crash with ":%s/\n//g" on long file. (Aidan Marlin, 2014 Jan 15)
-Christian Brabandt: patch to run this into a join. (2014 Jan 18)
+No error for missing endwhile. (ZyX, 2014 Mar 20)
 
-Add digraph for Rouble: =P.  What's the Unicode?
-
-Issue 174: Detect Mason files.
-
-Phpcomplete.vim update. (Complex, 2014 Jan 15)
+Patch to add :arglocal and :arglists. (Marcin Szamotulski, 2014 Aug 6)
 
 PHP syntax is extremely slow. (Anhad Jai Singh, 2014 Jan 19)
 
-Patch to make has() check for Vim version and patch at the same time.
-(Marc Weber, 2013 Jun 7)
+Spell files use a latin single quote. Unicode also has another single quote:
+0x2019.  (Ron Aaron, 2014 Apr 4)
+New OpenOffice spell files support this with ICONV.  But they are not
+compatible with Vim spell files.  The old files can no longer be downloaded.
 
-Regression on pach 7.4.034. (Ingo Karkat, 2013 Nov 20)
+Win32: use different args for SearchPath()? (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2009 Jan 30)
+Also fixes wrong result from executable().
+Update from Ken Takata, 2014 Jan 10. Newer 2014 Apr 3.
 
-Patch to include smack support (Linux security library). (Jose Bollo, 2014 Jan
-14) Update Jan 15.
+Win32: patch to use 64 bit stat() if possible. (Ken Takata, 2014 May 12)
+More tests May 14. Update May 29.  Update Aug 10.
 
-Tag list, as used for :tjump, does not unescape regexp. (Gary Johnson, 2014 Jan
-6) With patch in another message.
+The garbage collector may use too much stack.  Make set_ref_in_item()
+iterative instead of recursive.   Test program by Marc Weber (2013 Dec 10)
+Patch by Ben Fritz, 2014 Jun 22.
+
+Idea: For a window in the middle (has window above and below it), use
+right-mouse-drag on the status line to move a window up/down without changing
+it's height?  It's like dragging the status bar above it at the same time.
+
+Can we make ":unlet $VAR" use unsetenv() to delete the env var?
+What for systems that don't have unsetenv()?
+
+This does not give an error: (Andre Sihera, 2014 Mar 21)
+    vim -u NONE 1 2 3 -c 'bufdo if 1 | echo 1'
+This neither: (ZyX)
+    vim -u NONE 1 2 3 -c 'bufdo while 1 | echo 1'
+
+'viewdir' default on MS-Windows is not a good choice, it's a system directory.
+Change 'viewdir' to "$HOME/vimfiles/view" and use 'viewdiralt' to also read
+from?
+
+Problem with upwards search on Windows (works OK on Linux). (Brett Stahlman,
+2014 Jun 8)
+
+Include a plugin manager with Vim? Neobundle seems to be the best currently.
+Long message about this from ZyX, 2014 Mar 23.  And following replies.
+Also see http://vim-wiki.mawercer.de/wiki/topic/vim%20plugin%20managment.html
+User view:
+- Support multiple sources, basically any http:// URL.  Be able to look into
+  the files before deciding to install.
+- Be able to try out a plugin and remove it again with (almost) no traces.
+- Each plugin needs a "manifest" file that has the version, dependencies
+  (including Vim version and features), conflicts, list of files, etc.
+  Updater uses that to decide what/how to update.
+  Dependencies can use a URL for specific versions, or short name for scripts
+  on vim.org.
+- Once a plugin is installed it remembers where it came from, updater checks
+  there.  Can manually update when really needed.
+- Must be possible to install for one user.  Also system wide?
+- Can edit plugin config with Vim. Can temporarily disable a plugin.
+- Run the update manually, find latest version and install.
+- Be able to download without special tools, must work for 95% of users.
+Implementation:
+- Avoid the 'runtimepath' getting long.  Need some other way to keep each
+  plugin separate.
+- When installing or updating, first figure out what needs to be done. This
+  may involve recursively fetching manifest files for dependencies.  Then show
+  the user what's going to change and ask for OK.
+- Scripts on Vim.org must be able to consist of several files.  Is zip format
+  sufficient?  Upload the manifest?  Or refer to a site that has the manifest?
+- Best is to fetch individual files or use a Vimball. Reduces dependency on
+  tools that might be missing and allows inspection of the files before
+  installing.
+Out of scope:
+- Overview of plugins, ratings, comments, etc.  That's another world.
+- Development work on plugins (although diff with distributed version would be
+  useful).
+
+Setting the spell file in a session only reads the local additions, not the
+normal spell file. (Enno Nagel, 2014 Mar 29)
+
+CTRL-] in Visual mode uses the selected text as a tag.  This does not work
+when preceded with CTRL-W. (Patrick Hemmer, 2014 Jun 28)
+
+When typing the first character of a command, e.g. "f", then using a menu, the
+menu item doesn't work.  Clear typeahead when using a menu?
+
+Editing an ascii file as ucs-2 or ucs-4 causes display errors.
+(ZyX, 2014 Mar 30)
+
+":Next 1 some-arg" does not complain about trailing argument.  Also for
+various other commands.  (ZyX, 2014 Mar 30)
+
+patch to skip sort if no line matches the expression.
+(Christian Brabandt, 2014 Jun 25)
+
+Patch to add sortuniq(). (Cade Forester, 2014 Mar 19)
+Or add uniq() instead?  Patch by lcd47, but it has problems.
+
+Patch to support sorting on floating point number.  (Alex Jakushev, 2010 Oct
+30)
+
+Patch to support expression argument to sort() instead of a function name.
+Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2013 May 31.
+Or should we add a more general mechanism, like lambda functions?
 
 VMS: Select() doesn't work properly, typing ESC may hang Vim.  Use sys$qiow
 instead. (Samuel Ferencik, 2013 Sep 28)
 
-Series of patches for NL vs NUL handling. (ZyX, 2013 Nov 3, Nov 9)
+Patch for XDG base directory support. (Jean François Bignolles, 2014 Mar 4)
+Remark on the docs.  Should not be a compile time feature.  But then what?
 
-Patch to add flag to shortmess to avoid giving completion messages.
-(Shougo Matsu, 2014 Jan 6, update Jan 11)
+Completion of ":e" is ":earlier", whould be ":edit".  Complete to the matching
+command instead of doing this alphabetically. (Mikel Jorgensen)
 
 Patch to add v:completed_item. (Shougo Matsu, 2013 Nov 29).
 
+Patch to get MSVC version in a nicer way. (Ken Takata, 2014 Jul 24)
+
 Patch to make test 100 work on MS-Windows. (Taro Muraoka, 2013 Dec 12)
 
 Patch to define macros for hardcoded values. (Elias Diem, 2013 Dec 14)
@@ -152,10 +264,16 @@ Issue 28.
 
 Go through more coverity reports.
 
+Patch to add ":undorecover", get as much text out of the undo file as
+possible. (Christian Brabandt, 2014 Mar 12, update Aug 16)
+
 Include Haiku port? (Adrien Destugues, Siarzhuk Zharski, 2013 Oct 24)
 
 Updated spec ftplugin. (Matěj Cepl, 2013 Oct 16)
 
+Some quickfix messages appear twice. (Gary Johnson, 2014 Feb 16)
+Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2014 Feb 17.
+
 Patch to right-align signs. (James Kolb (email james), 2013 Sep 23)
 
 Patch to handle integer overflow. (Aaron Burrow, 2013 Dec 12)
@@ -163,8 +281,8 @@ Patch to handle integer overflow. (Aaron Burrow, 2013 Dec 12)
 With "$" in 'cpoptions' the popup menu isn't fully drawn. (Matti Niemenmaa,
 2013 Sep 5)
 
-Patch to add item in 'listchars' to repeat first character. (Nathaniel Braun,
-pragm, 2013 Oct 13)
+Patch to add "ntab" item in 'listchars' to repeat first character. (Nathaniel
+Braun, pragm, 2013 Oct 13)  A better solution 2014 Mar 5.
 
 Undo message is not always properly displayed.  Patch by Ken Takata, 2013 oct
 3.  Doesn't work properly according to Yukihiro Nakadaira.
@@ -217,10 +335,6 @@ GTK: problem with 'L' in 'guioptions' changing the window width.
 Patch to add option that tells whether small deletes go into the numbered
 registers. (Aryeh Leib Taurog, 2013 Nov 18)
 
-Win32: use different args for SearchPath()? (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2009 Jan 30)
-Also fixes wrong result from executable().
-Update from Ken Takata, 2014 Jan 10.
-
 Javascript file where indent gets stuck on: GalaxyMaster, 2012 May 3.
 
 The BufUnload event is triggered when re-using the empty buffer.
@@ -242,19 +356,12 @@ Works OK for echo, just not for  ":call" and ":call call()". (Ted, 2011 Mar
 Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2013 Mar 23.
 Not 100% sure this is the right solution.
 
-Patch to support expression argument to sort() instead of a function name.
-Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2013 May 31.
-Or should we add a more general mechanism, like lambda functions?
-
 Problem caused by patch 7.3.638: window->open does not update window
 correctly. Issue 91.
 
 Patch to add {lhs} to :mapclear: clear all maps starting with {lhs}.
 (Christian Brabandt, 2013 Dec 9)
 
-The garbage collector may use too much stack.  Make set_ref_in_item()
-iterative instead of recursive.   Test program by Marc Weber (2013 Dec 10)
-
 Exception caused by argument of return is not caught by try/catch.
 (David Barnett, 2013 Nov 19)
 
@@ -295,6 +402,7 @@ Patch to allow setting w:quickfix_title via setqflist() and setloclist()
 functions. (Christian Brabandt, 2013 May 8, update May 21)
 Patch to add getlocstack() / setlocstack(). (Christian Brabandt, 2013 May 14)
 Second one. Update May 22.
+Update by Daniel Hahler, 2014 Jul 4, Aug 14.
 
 Patch to make fold updates much faster. (Christian Brabandt, 2012 Dec)
 
@@ -309,9 +417,6 @@ Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2013 Apr 20, unfinished.
 
 Bug: findfile("any", "file:///tmp;") does not work.
 
-v:register is not directly reset to " after a delete command that specifies a
-register.  It is reset after the next command. (Steve Vermeulen, 2013 Mar 16)
-
 'ff' is wrong for one-line file without EOL. (Issue 77)
 
 Patch to set antialiasing style on Windows. (Ondrej Balaz, 2013 Mar 14)
@@ -321,11 +426,10 @@ In the ATTENTION message about an existing swap file, mention the name of the
 process that is running.  It might actually be some other program, e.g. after
 a reboot.
 
-MS-Windows: Crash opening very long file name starting with "\\".
-(Christian Brock, 2012 Jun 29)
-
 Patch to have text objects defined by arbitrary single characters. (Daniel
-Thau, 2013 Nov 20)
+Thau, 2013 Nov 20, 2014 Jan 29, 2014 Jan 31)
+Ben Fritz: problem with 'selection' set to "exclusive".
+Updated to current Vim, not quite right yet. (Ben Fritz, 2014 Mar 27)
 
 Patch to select the next or previous text object if there isn't one under the
 cursor. (Daniel Thau, 2013 Nov 20)
@@ -353,13 +457,6 @@ signs?  Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2013 Aug 22.
 
 Patch to remove flicker from popup menu. (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2013 Aug 15)
 
-Patch to use directX to draw text on Windows.  Adds the 'renderoptions'
-option.  (Taro Muraoka, 2013 Jan 25, update 2013 Apr 3, May 14)
-Fixes this problem:
-8   Win32: Multi-byte characters are not displayed, even though the same font
-    in Notepad can display them. (Srinath Avadhanula)  Try with the
-    UTF-8-demo.txt page with Andale Mono.
-
 Patch to add 'completeselect' option.  Specifies how to select a candidate in
 insert completion. (Shougo, 2013 May 29)
 Update to add to existing 'completeopt'. 2013 May 30
@@ -392,9 +489,6 @@ Should be possible to enable/disable matchparen per window or buffer.
 Add a check for b:no_match_paren in Highlight_matching_Pair() (Marcin
 Szamotulski, 2012 Nov 8)
 
-Crash in autocmd that unloads buffers in a BufUnload event. (Andrew Pimlott,
-2012 Aug 11)  Disallow :new when BufUnload is being handled?
-
 Issue 72: 'autochdir' causes problems for :vimgrep.
 
 Session file creation: 'autochdir' causes trouble.  Keep it off until after
@@ -427,10 +521,6 @@ Patch to add tagfunc().  Cleaned up by Christian Brabandt, 2013 Jun 22.
 Help for 'b:undo_indent'. (Thilo Six, 2012 May 28)
 Also question if examples are correct.
 
-It should be possible to make globpath() return a list instead of a string,
-like with glob(). (Greg Novack, 2012 Nov 2)
-Patch by Adnan Zafar, 2013 Jul 15.
-
 The input map for CTRL-O in mswin.vim causes problems after CTRL-X CTRL-O.
 Suggestion for another map. (Philip Mat, 2012 Jun 18)
 But use "gi" instead of "a".  Or use CTRL-\ CTRL-O.
@@ -441,6 +531,9 @@ Aug 16)
 When there are no command line arguments ":next" and ":argu" give E163, which
 is confusing.  Should say "the argument list is empty".
 
+xterm supports escape sequences to mark a paste operation.  Need to be
+enabled. (Bruno Sutic, 2014 Jul 11)  How to know the terminal supports this?
+
 URXVT:
 - will get stuck if byte sequence does not contain the expected semicolon.
 - Use urxvt mouse support also in xterm.  Explanations:
@@ -468,14 +561,6 @@ Apr 18)
 Patch for has('unnamedplus') docs. (Tony Mechelynck, 2011 Sep 27)
 And one for gui_x11.txt.
 
--   Patch for 'breakindent' option: repeat indent for wrapped line. (Vaclav
-    Smilauer, 2004 Sep 13, fix Oct 31, update 2007 May 30)
-    Version for latest MacVim: Tobia Conforto, 2009 Nov 23
-    More recent version: https://retracile.net/wiki/VimBreakIndent
-    Posted to vim-dev by Taylor Hedberg, 2011 Nov 25
-    Update by Taylor Hedberg, 2013 May 30.
-    Updated for Vim 7.4 by Ken Takata, 2013 Oct 5.
-
 ":cd" doesn't work when current directory path contains "**".
 finddir() has the same problem.  (Yukihiro Nakadaira, 2012 Jan 10)
 Requires a rewrite of the file_file_in_path code.
@@ -584,7 +669,8 @@ Patch to make "z=" work when 'spell' is off.  Does this have nasty side
 effects?  (Christian Brabandt, 2012 Aug 5, Update 2013 Aug 12)
 Would also need to do this for spellbadword() and spellsuggest().
 
-Patch for variable tabstops.
+Patch for variable tabstops.  On github (Christian Brabandt, 2014 May 15)
+Update Aug 16 (email).
 
 On 64 bit MS-Windows "long" is only 32 bits, but we sometimes need to store a
 64 bits value.  Change all number options to use nropt_T and define it to the
@@ -626,9 +712,6 @@ Build problem with small features on Mac OS X 10.6. (Rainer, 2011 Jan 24)
 
 "0g@$" puts '] on last byte of multi-byte. (ZyX, 2011 Jan 22)
 
-Patch to support sorting on floating point number.  (Alex Jakushev, 2010 Oct
-30)
-
 Patch to addd TextDeletePost and TextYankPost events. (Philippe Vaucher, 2011
 May 24)  Update May 26.
 
@@ -714,9 +797,6 @@ crash? (Raiwil, 2010 Nov 17)
 Patch to add FoldedLineNr highlighting: different highlighting for the line
 number of a closed fold. (eXerigumo Clanjor, 2013 Jul 15)
 
-Does not work with NFA regexp engine:
-- \%u, \%x, \%o, \%d followed by a composing character
-
 Regexp engine performance:
 - Profiling:
 	./vim -u NONE -s ~/vim/test/ruby.vim
@@ -761,10 +841,6 @@ setpos() does not restore cursor position after :normal. (Tyru, 2010 Aug 11)
     file names unique, also support this for 'backupdir'. (Mikolaj Machowski)
     Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2010 Oct 21.
 
-getpos()/setpos() don't include curswant.  getpos() could return a fifth
-element.  setpos() could accept an optional fifth element.
-Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2010 Sep 6.  Again 2013 Aug 22.
-
 With "tw=55 fo+=a" typing space before ) doesn't work well. (Scott Mcdermott,
 2010 Oct 24)
 
@@ -784,9 +860,6 @@ C-indenting: A matching { in a comment is ignored, but intermediate { are not
 checked to be in a comment.  Implement FM_SKIPCOMM flag of findmatchlimit().
 Issue 46.
 
-When 'paste' is changed with 'pastetoggle', the ruler doesn't reflect this
-right away. (Samuel Ferencik, 2010 Dec 7)
-
 Mac with X11: clipboard doesn't work properly. (Raf, 2010 Aug 16)
 
 Using CompilerSet doesn't record where an option was set from.  E.g., in the
@@ -809,8 +882,6 @@ Patch: Let rare word highlighting overrule good word highlighting.
 When 'lines' is 25 and 'scrolloff' is 12, "j" scrolls zero or two lines
 instead of one. (Constantin Pan, 2010 Sep 10)
 
-Crash in setqflist(). (Benoit Mortgat, 2010 Nov 18)
-
 Gui menu edit/paste in block mode insert only inserts in one line (Bjorn
 Winckler, 2011 May 11)
 Requires a map mode for Insert mode started from blockwise Visual mode.
@@ -1040,6 +1111,11 @@ Session file generates error upon loading, cause by --remote-silent-tab.
 Using ~ works OK on 'a' with composing char, but not on 0x0418  with composing
 char 0x0301. (Tony Mechelynck, 2009 Mar 4)
 
+Searching for composing char works, but not when inside []. (ZyX, Benjamin R.
+Haskell, 2010 Aug 24)
+
+This does not work yet: "a\(%C\)" (get composing characters into a submatch).
+
 A function on a dictionary is not profiled. (ZyX, 2010 Dec 25)
 
 Inconsistent: starting with $LANG set to es_ES.utf-8 gives Spanish
@@ -1124,6 +1200,7 @@ is executed.
 
 ":pedit %" with a BufReadPre autocommand causes the cursor to move to the
 first line. (Ingo Karkat, 2008 Jul 1)  Ian Kelling is working on this.
+Similar problem with ":e". (Marc Montu, 2014 Apr 22)
 
 Wildmenu not deleted: "gvim -u NONE", ":set nocp wildmenu cmdheight=3
 laststatus=2", CTRL-D CTRL-H CTRL-H CTRL-H. (A.Politz, 2008 April 1)
@@ -1267,9 +1344,6 @@ When 'smartcase' is set and using CTRL-L to add to the search pattern it may
 result in no matches.  Convert chars to lower case? (Erik Wognsen, 2009 Apr
 16)
 
-Searching for composing char works, but not when inside []. (ZyX, Benjamin R.
-Haskell, 2010 Aug 24)
-
 Fail to edit file after failed register access.  Error flag remains set?
 (Lech Lorens, 2010 Aug 30)
 
@@ -1304,10 +1378,6 @@ Jul 31)
 C syntax: {} inside () causes following {} to be highlighted as error.
 (Michalis Giannakidis, 2006 Jun 1)
 
-Can't easily close the help window, like ":pc" closes the preview window and
-":ccl" closes the quickfix window.  Add ":hclose". (Chris Gaal)
-Patch for :helpclose, Christian Brabandt, 2010 Sep 6.
-
 When 'diffopt' has "context:0" a single deleted line causes two folds to merge
 and mess up syncing. (Austin Jennings, 2008 Jan 31)
 
@@ -1471,6 +1541,7 @@ Engelke, 2007 Dec 20 - 2008 Jan 17)
 
 Win64: Seek error in swap file for a very big file (3 Gbyte).  Check storing
 pointer in long and seek offset in 64 bit var.
+Patches from Ken Takata might help (2014 Apr 17)
 
 Win32: patch for fullscreen mode. (Liushaolin, 2008 April 17)
 
@@ -1478,9 +1549,6 @@ Win32: When 'shell' is bash shellescape() doesn't always do the right thing.
 Depends on 'shellslash', 'shellquote' and 'shellxquote', but shellescape()
 only takes 'shellslash' into account.
 
-Pressing the 'pastetoggle' key doesn't update the statusline. (Jan Christoph
-Ebersbach, 2008 Feb 1)
-
 Menu item that does "xxd -r" doesn't work when 'fileencoding' is utf-16.
 Check for this and use iconv?  (Edward L. Fox, 2007 Sep 12)
 Does the conversion in the other direction work when 'fileencodings' is set
@@ -2747,8 +2815,6 @@ Problems that will (probably) not be solved:
     input method called from GDK code.  Without Perl it doesn't crash.
 -   VMS: Vimdiff doesn't work with the VMS diff, because the output looks
     different.  This makes test 47 fail.  Install a Unix-compatible diff.
--   VMS v7.1 and older: Tests 21 and 32 fail.  From VMS v7.1-2 and newer Vim
-    does not have this behavior. (Zoltan Arpadffy)
 -   Win32 GUI: mouse wheel always scrolls rightmost window.  The events arrive
     in Vim as if the rightmost scrollbar was used.
 -   GTK with Gnome: Produces an error message when starting up:
@@ -3007,6 +3073,8 @@ Spell checking:
 
 
 Diff mode:
+9   When making small changes, e.g. deleting a character, update the diff.
+    Possibly without running diff.
 9   Instead invoking an external diff program, use builtin code.  One can be
     found here: http://www.ioplex.com/~miallen/libmba/dl/src/diff.c
     It's quite big and badly documented though.
@@ -3102,12 +3170,8 @@ Multi-byte characters:
 8   toupper() function doesn't handle byte count changes.
 7   Searching and composing characters:
     When searching, should order of composing characters be ignored?
-    Add special item to match with a composing character, zero-width, so that
-    one can replace a base character and keep the composing characters.
     Add a special item to match with a composing character, so that composing
     characters can be manipulated.
-    Add a modifier to ignore composing characters, only compare base
-    characters.  Useful for Hebrew (Ron Aaron)
 8   Should implement 'delcombine' for command line editing.
 8   Detect overlong UTF-8 sequences and handle them like illegal bytes.
 8   ":s/x/\u\1/" doesn't work, making uppercase isn't done for multi-byte
@@ -3905,7 +3969,6 @@ Autocommands:
 		      when exiting isn't a good idea.
     CursorHoldC     - CursorHold while command-line editing
     WinMoved	    - when windows have been moved around, e.g, ":wincmd J"
-    CmdUndefined    - Like FuncUndefined but for user commands.
     SearchPost	    - After doing a search command (e.g. to do "M")
     PreDirChanged/PostDirChanged
 		    - Before/after ":cd" has been used (for changing the
@@ -4213,8 +4276,7 @@ Insert mode:
 7   Use Tabs for the indent of starting lines, pad with spaces for
     continuation lines.  Allows changing 'tabstop' without messing up the
     indents.
-    'keeptabs': when set don't change the tabs and spaces used for indent,
-    when the indent remains the same or increases.
+    Patch by Lech Lorens, 2010 Mar.  Update by James McCoy, 2014 Mar 15.
 
 
 Java:

runtime/doc/undo.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*undo.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Sep 08
+*undo.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 May 24
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -97,9 +97,9 @@ change but joins in with the previous change use this command:
 			or redo.
 			{not in Vi}
 
-This is most useful when you need to prompt the user halfway a change.  For
-example in a function that calls |getchar()|.  Do make sure that there was a
-related change before this that you must join with.
+This is most useful when you need to prompt the user halfway through a change.
+For example in a function that calls |getchar()|.  Do make sure that there was
+a related change before this that you must join with.
 
 This doesn't work by itself, because the next key press will start a new
 change again.  But you can do something like this: >

runtime/doc/usr_08.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_08.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2006 Jul 18
+*usr_08.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Jul 06
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ window.  And you will notice a bar at the top with the two file names:
 
 You now have two tab pages.  The first one has a window for "thisfile" and the
 second one a window for "thatfile".  It's like two pages that are on top of
-eachother, with a tab sticking out of each page showing the file name.
+each other, with a tab sticking out of each page showing the file name.
 
 Now use the mouse to click on "thisfile" in the top line.  The result is
 

runtime/doc/usr_30.txt

@@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ be escaped with a backslash.  Example: >
 You can include special Vim keywords in the command specification.  The %
 character expands to the name of the current file.  So if you execute the
 command: >
-	:set makeprg=make\ %
+	:set makeprg=make\ %:S
 
 When you are editing main.c, then ":make" executes the following command: >
 
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ When you are editing main.c, then ":make" executes the following command: >
 This is not too useful, so you will refine the command a little and use the :r
 (root) modifier: >
 
-	:set makeprg=make\ %:r.o
+	:set makeprg=make\ %:r:S.o
 
 Now the command executed is as follows: >
 

runtime/doc/usr_40.txt

@@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ The ":map" command can be followed by another command.  A | character
 separates the two commands.  This also means that a | character can't be used
 inside a map command.  To include one, use <Bar> (five characters).  Example:
 >
-	:map <F8> :write <Bar> !checkin %<CR>
+	:map <F8> :write <Bar> !checkin %:S<CR>
 
 The same problem applies to the ":unmap" command, with the addition that you
 have to watch out for trailing white space.  These two commands are different:

runtime/doc/usr_41.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Jan 10
+*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Aug 16
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -623,6 +623,7 @@ List manipulation:					*list-functions*
 	map()			change each List item
 	sort()			sort a List
 	reverse()		reverse the order of a List
+	uniq()			remove copies of repeated adjacent items
 	split()			split a String into a List
 	join()			join List items into a String
 	range()			return a List with a sequence of numbers
@@ -707,6 +708,7 @@ Cursor and mark position:		*cursor-functions* *mark-functions*
 	cursor()		position the cursor at a line/column
 	screencol()		get screen column of the cursor
 	screenrow()		get screen row of the cursor
+	getcurpos()		get position of the cursor
 	getpos()		get position of cursor, mark, etc.
 	setpos()		set position of cursor, mark, etc.
 	byte2line()		get line number at a specific byte count
@@ -741,6 +743,7 @@ System functions and manipulation of files:
 	pathshorten()		shorten directory names in a path
 	simplify()		simplify a path without changing its meaning
 	executable()		check if an executable program exists
+	exepath()		full path of an executable program
 	filereadable()		check if a file can be read
 	filewritable()		check if a file can be written to
 	getfperm()		get the permissions of a file
@@ -753,7 +756,8 @@ System functions and manipulation of files:
 	mkdir()			create a new directory
 	delete()		delete a file
 	rename()		rename a file
-	system()		get the result of a shell command
+	system()		get the result of a shell command as a string
+	systemlist()		get the result of a shell command as a list
 	hostname()		name of the system
 	readfile()		read a file into a List of lines
 	writefile()		write a List of lines into a file
@@ -769,6 +773,7 @@ Date and Time:				*date-functions* *time-functions*
 Buffers, windows and the argument list:
 	argc()			number of entries in the argument list
 	argidx()		current position in the argument list
+	arglistid()		get id of the argument list
 	argv()			get one entry from the argument list
 	bufexists()		check if a buffer exists
 	buflisted()		check if a buffer exists and is listed
@@ -788,6 +793,7 @@ Command line:					*command-line-functions*
 	getcmdpos()		get position of the cursor in the command line
 	setcmdpos()		set position of the cursor in the command line
 	getcmdtype()		return the current command-line type
+	getcmdwintype()		return the current command-line window type
 
 Quickfix and location lists:			*quickfix-functions*
 	getqflist()		list of quickfix errors
@@ -822,6 +828,7 @@ Syntax and highlighting:	  *syntax-functions* *highlighting-functions*
 	synconcealed()		get info about concealing
 	diff_hlID()		get highlight ID for diff mode at a position
 	matchadd()		define a pattern to highlight (a "match")
+	matchaddpos()		define a list of positions to highlight
 	matcharg()		get info about |:match| arguments
 	matchdelete()		delete a match defined by |matchadd()| or a
 				|:match| command

runtime/doc/usr_42.txt

@@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ redefine what these items do (after the default menus are setup).
 item with a bitmap.  For example, define a new toolbar item with: >
 
 	:tmenu ToolBar.Compile  Compile the current file
-	:amenu ToolBar.Compile  :!cc % -o %:r<CR>
+	:amenu ToolBar.Compile  :!cc %:S -o %:r:S<CR>
 
 Now you need to create the icon.  For MS-Windows it must be in bitmap format,
 with the name "Compile.bmp".  For Unix XPM format is used, the file name is

runtime/doc/various.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*various.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 May 18
+*various.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Aug 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -234,25 +234,41 @@ g8			Print the hex values of the bytes used in the
 							*:!cmd* *:!* *E34*
 :!{cmd}			Execute {cmd} with the shell.  See also the 'shell'
 			and 'shelltype' option.
+
 			Any '!' in {cmd} is replaced with the previous
 			external command (see also 'cpoptions').  But not when
 			there is a backslash before the '!', then that
 			backslash is removed.  Example: ":!ls" followed by
 			":!echo ! \! \\!" executes "echo ls ! \!".
-			After the command has been executed, the timestamp of
-			the current file is checked |timestamp|.
+
 			A '|' in {cmd} is passed to the shell, you cannot use
 			it to append a Vim command.  See |:bar|.
+
+			If {cmd} contains "%" it is expanded to the current
+			file name.  Special characters are not escaped, use
+			quotes to avoid their special meaning: >
+				:!ls "%"
+<			If the file name contains a "$" single quotes might
+			work better (but a single quote causes trouble): >
+				:!ls '%'
+<			This should always work, but it's more typing: >
+				:exe "!ls " . shellescape(expand("%"))
+<
 			A newline character ends {cmd}, what follows is
 			interpreted as a following ":" command.  However, if
 			there is a backslash before the newline it is removed
 			and {cmd} continues.  It doesn't matter how many
 			backslashes are before the newline, only one is
 			removed.
+
 			On Unix the command normally runs in a non-interactive
 			shell.  If you want an interactive shell to be used
 			(to use aliases) set 'shellcmdflag' to "-ic".
 			For Win32 also see |:!start|.
+
+			After the command has been executed, the timestamp and
+			size of the current file is checked |timestamp|.
+
 			Vim redraws the screen after the command is finished,
 			because it may have printed any text.  This requires a
 			hit-enter prompt, so that you can read any messages.
@@ -321,6 +337,7 @@ N  *+dialog_con*	Support for |:confirm| with console dialog.
 N  *+dialog_con_gui*	Support for |:confirm| with GUI and console dialog.
 N  *+diff*		|vimdiff| and 'diff'
 N  *+digraphs*		|digraphs| *E196*
+m  *+directx*		Win32 GUI only: DirectX and |'renderoptions'|
    *+dnd*		Support for DnD into the "~ register |quote_~|.
 B  *+emacs_tags*	|emacs-tags| files
 N  *+eval*		expression evaluation |eval.txt|
@@ -363,6 +380,7 @@ N  *+mouse*		Mouse handling |mouse-using|
 N  *+mouseshape*	|'mouseshape'|
 B  *+mouse_dec*		Unix only: Dec terminal mouse handling |dec-mouse|
 N  *+mouse_gpm*		Unix only: Linux console mouse handling |gpm-mouse|
+N  *+mouse_jsbterm*	JSB mouse handling |jsbterm-mouse|
 B  *+mouse_netterm*	Unix only: netterm mouse handling |netterm-mouse|
 N  *+mouse_pterm*	QNX only: pterm mouse handling |qnx-terminal|
 N  *+mouse_sysmouse*	Unix only: *BSD console mouse handling |sysmouse|
@@ -418,7 +436,7 @@ N  *+user_commands*	User-defined commands. |user-commands|
 N  *+viminfo*		|'viminfo'|
 N  *+vertsplit*		Vertically split windows |:vsplit|
 N  *+virtualedit*	|'virtualedit'|
-S  *+visual*		Visual mode |Visual-mode|
+S  *+visual*		Visual mode |Visual-mode| Always enabled since 7.4.200.
 N  *+visualextra*	extra Visual mode commands |blockwise-operators|
 N  *+vreplace*		|gR| and |gr|
 N  *+wildignore*	|'wildignore'|

runtime/doc/version7.txt

@@ -942,6 +942,7 @@ New and extended functions: ~
 |tagfiles()|		List with tags file names
 |taglist()|		get list of matching tags (Yegappan Lakshmanan)
 |tr()|			translate characters (Ron Aaron)
+|uniq()|		remove copies of repeated adjacent list items
 |values()|		get List of Dictionary values
 |winnr()|		takes an argument: what window to use
 |winrestview()|		restore the view of the current window

runtime/doc/vi_diff.txt

@@ -540,7 +540,7 @@ character (and shows it immediately).
 Added :wnext command.  Same as ":write" followed by ":next".
 
 The ":w!" command always writes, also when the file is write protected.  In Vi
-you would have to do ":!chmod +w %" and ":set noro".
+you would have to do ":!chmod +w %:S" and ":set noro".
 
 When 'tildeop' has been set, "~" is an operator (must be followed by a
 movement command).

runtime/doc/visual.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*visual.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Nov 02
+*visual.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Mar 23
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ This is introduced in section |04.4| of the user manual.
 
 {Vi has no Visual mode, the name "visual" is used for Normal mode, to
 distinguish it from Ex mode}
-{not available when the |+visual| feature was disabled when compiling}
+{Since Vim 7.4.200 the |+visual| feature is always included}
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Using Visual mode					*visual-use*

runtime/doc/windows.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*windows.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2012 Nov 15
+*windows.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Mar 25
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -132,13 +132,20 @@ that have termcap codes for italics.
 CTRL-W s						*CTRL-W_s*
 CTRL-W S						*CTRL-W_S*
 CTRL-W CTRL-S						*CTRL-W_CTRL-S*
-:[N]sp[lit] [++opt] [+cmd]				*:sp* *:split*
+:[N]sp[lit] [++opt] [+cmd] [file]			*:sp* *:split*
 		Split current window in two.  The result is two viewports on
-		the same file.  Make new window N high (default is to use half
-		the height of the current window).  Reduces the current window
-		height to create room (and others, if the 'equalalways' option
-		is set, 'eadirection' isn't "hor", and one of them is higher
-		than the current or the new window).
+		the same file.
+		
+		Make the new window N high (default is to use half the height
+		of the current window).  Reduces the current window height to
+		create room (and others, if the 'equalalways' option is set,
+		'eadirection' isn't "hor", and one of them is higher than the
+		current or the new window).
+
+		If [file] is given it will be edited in the new window.  If it
+		is not loaded in any buffer, it will be read.  Else the new
+		window will use the already loaded buffer.
+
 		Note: CTRL-S does not work on all terminals and might block
 		further input, use CTRL-Q to get going again.
 		Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.

runtime/filetype.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim support file to detect file types
 "
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2014 Jan 06
+" Last Change:	2014 Aug 22
 
 " Listen very carefully, I will say this only once
 if exists("did_load_filetypes")
@@ -539,6 +539,20 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *enlightenment/*.cfg	setf c
 " Eterm
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *Eterm/*.cfg		setf eterm
 
+" Euphoria 3 or 4
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.eu,*.ew,*.ex,*.exu,*.exw  call s:EuphoriaCheck()
+if has("fname_case")
+   au BufNewFile,BufRead *.EU,*.EW,*.EX,*.EXU,*.EXW  call s:EuphoriaCheck()
+endif
+
+func! s:EuphoriaCheck()
+  if exists('g:filetype_euphoria')
+    exe 'setf ' . g:filetype_euphoria
+  else
+    setf euphoria3
+  endif
+endfunc
+
 " Lynx config files
 au BufNewFile,BufRead lynx.cfg			setf lynx
 
@@ -659,22 +673,26 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ed\(f\|if\|n\|o\)	setf edif
 " Embedix Component Description
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ecd			setf ecd
 
-" Eiffel or Specman
+" Eiffel or Specman or Euphoria
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.e,*.E			call s:FTe()
 
 " Elinks configuration
 au BufNewFile,BufRead */etc/elinks.conf,*/.elinks/elinks.conf	setf elinks
 
 func! s:FTe()
-  let n = 1
-  while n < 100 && n < line("$")
-    if getline(n) =~ "^\\s*\\(<'\\|'>\\)\\s*$"
-      setf specman
-      return
-    endif
-    let n = n + 1
-  endwhile
-  setf eiffel
+  if exists('g:filetype_euphoria')
+    exe 'setf ' . g:filetype_euphoria
+  else
+    let n = 1
+    while n < 100 && n < line("$")
+      if getline(n) =~ "^\\s*\\(<'\\|'>\\)\\s*$"
+        setf specman
+        return
+      endif
+      let n = n + 1
+    endwhile
+    setf eiffel
+  endif
 endfunc
 
 " ERicsson LANGuage; Yaws is erlang too
@@ -793,6 +811,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead {,.}gitolite.rc,example.gitolite.rc	setf perl
 " Gnuplot scripts
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.gpi			setf gnuplot
 
+" Go (Google)
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.go			setf go
+
 " GrADS scripts
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.gs			setf grads
 
@@ -846,7 +867,7 @@ func! s:FThtml()
       setf xhtml
       return
     endif
-    if getline(n) =~ '{%\s*\(extends\|block\)\>'
+    if getline(n) =~ '{%\s*\(extends\|block\|load\)\>'
       setf htmldjango
       return
     endif
@@ -971,7 +992,7 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.java,*.jav		setf java
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.jj,*.jjt		setf javacc
 
 " JavaScript, ECMAScript
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.js,*.javascript,*.es,*.jsx,*.json   setf javascript
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.js,*.javascript,*.es,*.jsx   setf javascript
 
 " Java Server Pages
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.jsp			setf jsp
@@ -989,12 +1010,18 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.jgr			setf jgraph
 " Jovial
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.jov,*.j73,*.jovial	setf jovial
 
+" JSON
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.json			setf json
+
 " Kixtart
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.kix			setf kix
 
 " Kimwitu[++]
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.k			setf kwt
 
+" Kivy
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.kv			setf kivy
+
 " KDE script
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ks			setf kscript
 
@@ -1020,7 +1047,7 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ldif			setf ldif
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ld			setf ld
 
 " Lex
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.lex,*.l			setf lex
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.lex,*.l,*.lxx,*.l++	setf lex
 
 " Libao
 au BufNewFile,BufRead */etc/libao.conf,*/.libao	setf libao
@@ -1121,7 +1148,7 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.map			setf map
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.markdown,*.mdown,*.mkd,*.mkdn,*.mdwn,README.md  setf markdown
 
 " Mason
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.mason,*.mhtml		setf mason
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.mason,*.mhtml,*.comp	setf mason
 
 " Matlab or Objective C
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.m			call s:FTm()
@@ -1628,6 +1655,20 @@ else
   au BufNewFile,BufRead *.rnw,*.snw			setf rnoweb
 endif
 
+" R Markdown file
+if has("fname_case")
+  au BufNewFile,BufRead *.Rmd,*.rmd,*.Smd,*.smd		setf rmd
+else
+  au BufNewFile,BufRead *.rmd,*.smd			setf rmd
+endif
+
+" R reStructuredText file
+if has("fname_case")
+  au BufNewFile,BufRead *.Rrst,*.rrst,*.Srst,*.srst	setf rrst
+else
+  au BufNewFile,BufRead *.rrst,*.srst			setf rrst
+endif
+
 " Rexx, Rebol or R
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.r,*.R			call s:FTr()
 
@@ -2243,6 +2284,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.v			setf verilog
 " Verilog-AMS HDL
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.va,*.vams		setf verilogams
 
+" SystemVerilog
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.sv,*.svh		setf systemverilog
+
 " VHDL
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.hdl,*.vhd,*.vhdl,*.vbe,*.vst  setf vhdl
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.vhdl_[0-9]*		call s:StarSetf('vhdl')
@@ -2273,6 +2317,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead vgrindefs			setf vgrindefs
 " VRML V1.0c
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.wrl			setf vrml
 
+" Vroom (vim testing and executable documentation)
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.vroom			setf vroom
+
 " Webmacro
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.wm			setf webmacro
 
@@ -2415,7 +2462,7 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.xsd			setf xsd
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.xsl,*.xslt		setf xslt
 
 " Yacc
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.yy			setf yacc
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.yy,*.yxx,*.y++		setf yacc
 
 " Yacc or racc
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.y			call s:FTy()
@@ -2640,7 +2687,7 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead zsh*,zlog*		call s:StarSetf('zsh')
 
 " Plain text files, needs to be far down to not override others.  This avoids
 " the "conf" type being used if there is a line starting with '#'.
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.txt,*.text		setf text
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.txt,*.text,README	setf text
 
 
 " Use the filetype detect plugins.  They may overrule any of the previously

runtime/ftplugin/clojure.vim

@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
 " Maintainer:	Sung Pae <self@sungpae.com>
 " URL:		https://github.com/guns/vim-clojure-static
 " License:	Same as Vim
-" Last Change:	08 September 2013
+" Last Change:	27 March 2014
 
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
 	finish
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ let b:did_ftplugin = 1
 let s:cpo_save = &cpo
 set cpo&vim
 
-let b:undo_ftplugin = 'setlocal iskeyword< define< formatoptions< comments< commentstring<'
+let b:undo_ftplugin = 'setlocal iskeyword< define< formatoptions< comments< commentstring< lispwords<'
 
 setlocal iskeyword+=?,-,*,!,+,/,=,<,>,.,:,$
 
@@ -23,14 +23,29 @@ setlocal iskeyword+=?,-,*,!,+,/,=,<,>,.,:,$
 " of user-defined def* definitions.
 setlocal define=\\v[(/]def(ault)@!\\S*
 
-" Remove 't' from 'formatoptions' to avoid auto-wrapping code. The '+=croql'
-" is standard ftplugin boilerplate, although it is arguably intrusive.
-setlocal formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql
+" Remove 't' from 'formatoptions' to avoid auto-wrapping code.
+setlocal formatoptions-=t
 
 " Lisp comments are routinely nested (e.g. ;;; SECTION HEADING)
 setlocal comments=n:;
 setlocal commentstring=;\ %s
 
+" Specially indented symbols from clojure.core and clojure.test.
+"
+" Clojure symbols are indented in the defn style when they:
+"
+"   * Define vars and anonymous functions
+"   * Create new lexical scopes or scopes with altered environments
+"   * Create conditional branches from a predicate function or value
+"
+" The arglists for these functions are generally in the form of [x & body];
+" Functions that accept a flat list of forms do not treat the first argument
+" specially and hence are not indented specially.
+"
+" -*- LISPWORDS -*-
+" Generated from https://github.com/guns/vim-clojure-static/blob/vim-release-010/clj/src/vim_clojure_static/generate.clj
+setlocal lispwords=as->,binding,bound-fn,case,catch,cond->,cond->>,condp,def,definline,definterface,defmacro,defmethod,defmulti,defn,defn-,defonce,defprotocol,defrecord,defstruct,deftest,deftest-,deftype,doseq,dotimes,doto,extend,extend-protocol,extend-type,fn,for,if,if-let,if-not,if-some,let,letfn,locking,loop,ns,proxy,reify,set-test,testing,when,when-first,when-let,when-not,when-some,while,with-bindings,with-in-str,with-local-vars,with-open,with-precision,with-redefs,with-redefs-fn,with-test
+
 " Provide insert mode completions for special forms and clojure.core. As
 " 'omnifunc' is set by popular Clojure REPL client plugins, we also set
 " 'completefunc' so that the user has some form of completion available when

runtime/ftplugin/debchangelog.vim

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 " Maintainer:   Debian Vim Maintainers <pkg-vim-maintainers@lists.alioth.debian.org>
 " Former Maintainers:   Michael Piefel <piefel@informatik.hu-berlin.de>
 "                       Stefano Zacchiroli <zack@debian.org>
-" Last Change:  2012-01-31
+" Last Change:  2014-01-31
 " License:      Vim License
 " URL:          http://hg.debian.org/hg/pkg-vim/vim/file/unstable/runtime/ftplugin/debchangelog.vim
 
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ function CloseBug()
 endfunction
 
 function Distribution(dist)
-    call setline(1, substitute(getline(1), ") [[:lower:] ]*;", ") " . a:dist . ";", ""))
+    call setline(1, substitute(getline(1), ')  *\%(UNRELEASED\|\l\+\);', ") " . a:dist . ";", ""))
 endfunction
 
 function Urgency(urg)

runtime/ftplugin/go.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:	Go
+" Maintainer:	David Barnett (https://github.com/google/vim-ft-go)
+" Last Change:	2014 Aug 16
+
+if exists('b:did_ftplugin')
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+setlocal formatoptions-=t
+
+setlocal comments=s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,://
+setlocal commentstring=//\ %s
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = 'setl fo< com< cms<'
+
+" vim: sw=2 sts=2 et

runtime/ftplugin/html.vim

@@ -20,49 +20,9 @@ if exists("g:ft_html_autocomment") && (g:ft_html_autocomment == 1)
     setlocal formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql
 endif
 
-
 if exists('&omnifunc')
-    " Distinguish between HTML versions
-    " To use with other HTML versions add another
-    " elseif condition to match proper DOCTYPE
-    setlocal omnifunc=htmlcomplete#CompleteTags
-
-    if &filetype == 'xhtml'
-            let b:html_omni_flavor = 'xhtml10s'
-    else
-            let b:html_omni_flavor = 'html401t'
-    endif
-    let i = 1
-    let line = ""
-    while i < 10 && i < line("$")
-        let line = getline(i)
-        if line =~ '<!DOCTYPE.*\<DTD '
-            break
-        endif
-        let i += 1
-    endwhile
-    if line =~ '<!DOCTYPE.*\<DTD '  " doctype line found above
-        if line =~ ' HTML 3\.2'
-            let b:html_omni_flavor = 'html32'
-        elseif line =~ ' XHTML 1\.1'
-            let b:html_omni_flavor = 'xhtml11'
-        else    " two-step detection with strict/frameset/transitional
-            if line =~ ' XHTML 1\.0'
-                let b:html_omni_flavor = 'xhtml10'
-            elseif line =~ ' HTML 4\.01'
-                let b:html_omni_flavor = 'html401'
-            elseif line =~ ' HTML 4.0\>'
-                let b:html_omni_flavor = 'html40'
-            endif
-            if line =~ '\<Transitional\>'
-                let b:html_omni_flavor .= 't'
-            elseif line =~ '\<Frameset\>'
-                let b:html_omni_flavor .= 'f'
-            else
-                let b:html_omni_flavor .= 's'
-            endif
-        endif
-    endif
+  setlocal omnifunc=htmlcomplete#CompleteTags
+  call htmlcomplete#DetectOmniFlavor()
 endif
 
 " HTML:  thanks to Johannes Zellner and Benji Fisher.

runtime/ftplugin/j.vim

@@ -1,18 +1,75 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin
 " Language:	J
 " Maintainer:	David Bürgin <676c7473@gmail.com>
-" Last Change:	2013-10-06
+" URL:		https://github.com/glts/vim-j
+" Last Change:	2014-04-05
 
-if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+if exists('b:did_ftplugin')
   finish
 endif
 let b:did_ftplugin = 1
 
-setlocal iskeyword=48-57,65-90,_,97-122
+let s:save_cpo = &cpo
+set cpo&vim
+
+setlocal iskeyword=48-57,A-Z,_,a-z
 setlocal comments=:NB.
 setlocal commentstring=NB.\ %s
 setlocal formatoptions-=t
 setlocal shiftwidth=2 softtabstop=2 expandtab
 setlocal matchpairs=(:)
 
-let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl mps< et< sts< sw< fo< cms< com< isk<"
+let b:undo_ftplugin = 'setlocal matchpairs< expandtab< softtabstop< shiftwidth< formatoptions< commentstring< comments< iskeyword<'
+
+" Section movement with ]] ][ [[ []. The start/end patterns below are amended
+" inside the function in order to avoid matching on the current cursor line.
+let s:sectionstart = '.\{-}\<\%([0-4]\|13\|noun\|adverb\|conjunction\|verb\|monad\|dyad\)\s\+\%(:\s*0\|def\s\+0\|define\)\>.*'
+let s:sectionend = '\s*)\s*'
+
+function! s:SearchSection(end, backwards, visualmode) abort
+  if a:visualmode !=# ''
+    normal! gv
+  endif
+  let flags = a:backwards ? 'bsW' : 'sW'
+  if a:end
+    call search('^' . s:sectionend . (a:backwards ? '\n\_.\{-}\%#' : '$'), flags)
+  else
+    call search('^' . s:sectionstart . (a:backwards ? '\n\_.\{-}\%#' : '$'), flags)
+  endif
+endfunction
+
+noremap <script> <buffer> <silent> ]] :<C-U>call <SID>SearchSection(0, 0, '')<CR>
+xnoremap <script> <buffer> <silent> ]] :<C-U>call <SID>SearchSection(0, 0, visualmode())<CR>
+sunmap <buffer> ]]
+noremap <script> <buffer> <silent> ][ :<C-U>call <SID>SearchSection(1, 0, '')<CR>
+xnoremap <script> <buffer> <silent> ][ :<C-U>call <SID>SearchSection(1, 0, visualmode())<CR>
+sunmap <buffer> ][
+noremap <script> <buffer> <silent> [[ :<C-U>call <SID>SearchSection(0, 1, '')<CR>
+xnoremap <script> <buffer> <silent> [[ :<C-U>call <SID>SearchSection(0, 1, visualmode())<CR>
+sunmap <buffer> [[
+noremap <script> <buffer> <silent> [] :<C-U>call <SID>SearchSection(1, 1, '')<CR>
+xnoremap <script> <buffer> <silent> [] :<C-U>call <SID>SearchSection(1, 1, visualmode())<CR>
+sunmap <buffer> []
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin .= ' | silent! execute "unmap <buffer> ]]"'
+                   \ . ' | silent! execute "unmap <buffer> ]["'
+                   \ . ' | silent! execute "unmap <buffer> [["'
+                   \ . ' | silent! execute "unmap <buffer> []"'
+
+" Browse dialog filter on Windows (see ":help browsefilter")
+if has('gui_win32') && !exists('b:browsefilter')
+  let b:browsefilter = "J Script Files (*.ijs)\t*.ijs\n"
+                   \ . "All Files (*.*)\t*.*\n"
+  let b:undo_ftplugin .= ' | unlet! b:browsefilter'
+endif
+
+" Enhanced "%" matching (see ":help matchit")
+if exists('loaded_matchit') && !exists('b:match_words')
+  let b:match_ignorecase = 0
+  let b:match_words = '^.\{-}\<\%([0-4]\|13\|noun\|adverb\|conjunction\|verb\|monad\|dyad\)\s\+\%(\:\s*0\|def\s\+0\|define\)\>:^\s*\:\s*$:^\s*)\s*$'
+                  \ . ',\<\%(for\%(_\a\k*\)\=\|if\|select\|try\|whil\%(e\|st\)\)\.:\<\%(case\|catch[dt]\=\|else\%(if\)\=\|fcase\)\.:\<end\.'
+  let b:undo_ftplugin .= ' | unlet! b:match_ignorecase b:match_words'
+endif
+
+let &cpo = s:save_cpo
+unlet s:save_cpo

runtime/ftplugin/json.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin
+" Language:		JSON
+" Maintainer:		David Barnett <daviebdawg+vim@gmail.com>
+" Last Change:		2014 Jul 16
+
+if exists('b:did_ftplugin')
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = 'setlocal formatoptions< comments< commentstring<'
+
+setlocal formatoptions-=t
+
+" JSON has no comments.
+setlocal comments=
+setlocal commentstring=

runtime/ftplugin/python.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language:	python
 " Maintainer:	Johannes Zellner <johannes@zellner.org>
-" Last Change:	2013 Nov 28
+" Last Change:	2014 Feb 09
 " Last Change By Johannes: Wed, 21 Apr 2004 13:13:08 CEST
 
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin") | finish | endif
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ set cpo&vim
 
 setlocal cinkeys-=0#
 setlocal indentkeys-=0#
-setlocal include=\s*\\(from\\\|import\\)
+setlocal include=^\\s*\\(from\\\|import\\)
 setlocal includeexpr=substitute(v:fname,'\\.','/','g')
 setlocal suffixesadd=.py
 setlocal comments=b:#,fb:-

runtime/ftplugin/r.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language: R
+" Maintainer: Jakson Alves de Aquino <jalvesaq@gmail.com>
+" Last Change:	Sun Feb 23, 2014  04:07PM
+
+" Only do this when not yet done for this buffer
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+
+" Don't load another plugin for this buffer
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo&vim
+
+setlocal iskeyword=@,48-57,_,.
+setlocal formatoptions-=t
+setlocal commentstring=#\ %s
+setlocal comments=:#',:###,:##,:#
+
+if has("gui_win32") && !exists("b:browsefilter")
+  let b:browsefilter = "R Source Files (*.R)\t*.R\n" .
+        \ "Files that include R (*.Rnw *.Rd *.Rmd *.Rrst)\t*.Rnw;*.Rd;*.Rmd;*.Rrst\n" .
+        \ "All Files (*.*)\t*.*\n"
+endif
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl cms< com< fo< isk< | unlet! b:browsefilter"
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save

runtime/ftplugin/rhelp.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language: R help file
+" Maintainer: Jakson Alves de Aquino <jalvesaq@gmail.com>
+" Last Change:	Wed Jul 09, 2014  06:23PM
+
+" Only do this when not yet done for this buffer
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+
+" Don't load another plugin for this buffer
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo&vim
+
+setlocal iskeyword=@,48-57,_,.
+
+if has("gui_win32") && !exists("b:browsefilter")
+  let b:browsefilter = "R Source Files (*.R *.Rnw *.Rd *.Rmd *.Rrst)\t*.R;*.Rnw;*.Rd;*.Rmd;*.Rrst\n" .
+        \ "All Files (*.*)\t*.*\n"
+endif
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl isk< | unlet! b:browsefilter"
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save
+
+" vim: sw=2

runtime/ftplugin/rmd.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language: R help file
+" Maintainer: Jakson Alves de Aquino <jalvesaq@gmail.com>
+" Last Change:	Wed Jul 09, 2014  06:23PM
+" Original work by Alex Zvoleff (adjusted for rmd by Michel Kuhlmann)
+
+" Only do this when not yet done for this buffer
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+
+runtime! ftplugin/html.vim ftplugin/html_*.vim ftplugin/html/*.vim
+
+setlocal comments=fb:*,fb:-,fb:+,n:> commentstring=>\ %s
+setlocal formatoptions+=tcqln
+setlocal formatlistpat=^\\s*\\d\\+\\.\\s\\+\\\|^\\s*[-*+]\\s\\+
+setlocal iskeyword=@,48-57,_,.
+
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo&vim
+
+" Enables pandoc if it is installed
+unlet! b:did_ftplugin
+runtime ftplugin/pandoc.vim
+
+" Don't load another plugin for this buffer
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+if has("gui_win32") && !exists("b:browsefilter")
+  let b:browsefilter = "R Source Files (*.R *.Rnw *.Rd *.Rmd *.Rrst)\t*.R;*.Rnw;*.Rd;*.Rmd;*.Rrst\n" .
+        \ "All Files (*.*)\t*.*\n"
+endif
+
+if exists('b:undo_ftplugin')
+  let b:undo_ftplugin .= " | setl cms< com< fo< flp< isk< | unlet! b:browsefilter"
+else
+  let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl cms< com< fo< flp< isk< | unlet! b:browsefilter"
+endif
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save
+
+" vim: sw=2

runtime/ftplugin/rnoweb.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language: Rnoweb
+" Maintainer: Jakson Alves de Aquino <jalvesaq@gmail.com>
+" Last Change:	Wed Jul 09, 2014  06:23PM
+
+" Only do this when not yet done for this buffer
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo&vim
+
+runtime! ftplugin/tex.vim
+
+" Don't load another plugin for this buffer
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+" Enables Vim-Latex-Suite, LaTeX-Box if installed
+runtime ftplugin/tex_*.vim
+
+setlocal iskeyword=@,48-57,_,.
+setlocal suffixesadd=.bib,.tex
+setlocal comments=b:%,b:#,b:##,b:###,b:#'
+
+if has("gui_win32") && !exists("b:browsefilter")
+  let b:browsefilter = "R Source Files (*.R *.Rnw *.Rd *.Rmd *.Rrst)\t*.R;*.Rnw;*.Rd;*.Rmd;*.Rrst\n" .
+        \ "All Files (*.*)\t*.*\n"
+endif
+
+if exists('b:undo_ftplugin')
+  let b:undo_ftplugin .= " | setl isk< sua< com< | unlet! b:browsefilter"
+else
+  let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl isk< sua< com< | unlet! b:browsefilter"
+endif
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save
+
+" vim: sw=2

runtime/ftplugin/rrst.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language: reStructuredText documentation format with R code
+" Maintainer: Jakson Alves de Aquino <jalvesaq@gmail.com>
+" Last Change:	Wed Jul 09, 2014  06:23PM
+" Original work by Alex Zvoleff
+
+" Only do this when not yet done for this buffer
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+
+" Don't load another plugin for this buffer
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo&vim
+
+setlocal comments=fb:*,fb:-,fb:+,n:> commentstring=>\ %s
+setlocal formatoptions+=tcqln
+setlocal formatlistpat=^\\s*\\d\\+\\.\\s\\+\\\|^\\s*[-*+]\\s\\+
+setlocal iskeyword=@,48-57,_,.
+
+if has("gui_win32") && !exists("b:browsefilter")
+  let b:browsefilter = "R Source Files (*.R *.Rnw *.Rd *.Rmd *.Rrst)\t*.R;*.Rnw;*.Rd;*.Rmd;*.Rrst\n" .
+        \ "All Files (*.*)\t*.*\n"
+endif
+
+if exists('b:undo_ftplugin')
+  let b:undo_ftplugin .= " | setl cms< com< fo< flp< isk< | unlet! b:browsefilter"
+else
+  let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl cms< com< fo< flp< isk< | unlet! b:browsefilter"
+endif
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save
+
+" vim: sw=2

runtime/ftplugin/spec.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 " Plugin to update the %changelog section of RPM spec files
 " Filename: spec.vim
-" Maintainer: Gustavo Niemeyer <niemeyer@conectiva.com>
-" Last Change: 2012 Mar 07
+" Maintainer: Igor Gnatenko i.gnatenko.brain@gmail.com
+" Former Maintainer: Gustavo Niemeyer <niemeyer@conectiva.com> (until March 2014)
+" Last Change: Sun Mar 2 11:24 MSK 2014 Igor Gnatenko
 
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
 	finish
@@ -150,6 +151,10 @@ if !exists("*s:ParseRpmVars")
 		execute a:strline
 		let definestr = "^[ \t]*%define[ \t]\\+" . varname . "[ \t]\\+\\(.*\\)$"
 		let linenum = search(definestr, "bW")
+		if (linenum == 0)
+			let definestr = substitute(definestr, "%define", "%global", "")
+			let linenum = search(definestr, "bW")
+		endif
 		if (linenum != -1)
 			let ret = ret .  substitute(getline(linenum), definestr, "\\1", "")
 		else

runtime/ftplugin/systemverilog.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:    SystemVerilog
+" Maintainer:  kocha <kocha.lsifrontend@gmail.com>
+" Last Change: 12-Aug-2013. 
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+
+" Behaves just like Verilog
+runtime! ftplugin/verilog.vim

runtime/ftplugin/text.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin
+" Language:		Text
+" Maintainer:		David Barnett <daviebdawg+vim@gmail.com>
+" Last Change:		2014 Jul 09
+
+if exists('b:did_ftplugin')
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = 'setlocal comments< commentstring<'
+
+" We intentionally don't set formatoptions-=t since text should wrap as text.
+
+" Pseudo comment leaders to indent bulleted lists.
+setlocal comments=fb:-,fb:*
+setlocal commentstring=

runtime/ftplugin/vroom.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:	Vroom (vim testing and executable documentation)
+" Maintainer:	David Barnett (https://github.com/google/vim-ft-vroom)
+" Last Change:	2014 Jul 23
+
+if exists('b:did_ftplugin')
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo-=C
+
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = 'setlocal formatoptions< shiftwidth< softtabstop<' .
+    \ ' expandtab< iskeyword< comments< commentstring<'
+
+setlocal formatoptions-=t
+
+" The vroom interpreter doesn't accept anything but 2-space indent.
+setlocal shiftwidth=2
+setlocal softtabstop=2
+setlocal expandtab
+
+" To allow tag lookup and autocomplete for whole autoload functions, '#' must be
+" a keyword character. This also conforms to the behavior of ftplugin/vim.vim.
+setlocal iskeyword+=#
+
+" Vroom files have no comments (text is inert documentation unless indented).
+setlocal comments=
+setlocal commentstring=
+
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save

runtime/indent/clojure.vim

@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 " Maintainer:	Sung Pae <self@sungpae.com>
 " URL:		https://github.com/guns/vim-clojure-static
 " License:	Same as Vim
-" Last Change:	16 December 2013
+" Last Change:	27 March 2014
 
 " TODO: Indenting after multibyte characters is broken:
 "       (let [Δ (if foo
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ let b:did_indent = 1
 let s:save_cpo = &cpo
 set cpo&vim
 
-let b:undo_indent = 'setlocal autoindent< smartindent< lispwords< expandtab< softtabstop< shiftwidth< indentexpr< indentkeys<'
+let b:undo_indent = 'setlocal autoindent< smartindent< expandtab< softtabstop< shiftwidth< indentexpr< indentkeys<'
 
 setlocal noautoindent nosmartindent
 setlocal softtabstop=2 shiftwidth=2 expandtab
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ if exists("*searchpairpos")
 	endfunction
 
 	function! s:IsParen()
-		return s:CurrentChar() =~ '\v[\(\)\[\]\{\}]' &&
+		return s:CurrentChar() =~# '\v[\(\)\[\]\{\}]' &&
 		     \ s:SynIdName() !~? '\vstring|regex|comment|character'
 	endfunction
 
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ if exists("*searchpairpos")
 			   \ ? a:patterns
 			   \ : map(split(a:patterns, ','), '"^" . v:val . "$"')
 		for pat in list
-			if a:string =~ pat | return 1 | endif
+			if a:string =~# pat | return 1 | endif
 		endfor
 	endfunction
 
@@ -148,6 +148,10 @@ if exists("*searchpairpos")
 		return val
 	endfunction
 
+	function! s:StripNamespaceAndMacroChars(word)
+		return substitute(a:word, "\\v%(.*/|[#'`~@^,]*)(.*)", '\1', '')
+	endfunction
+
 	function! s:ClojureIsMethodSpecialCaseWorker(position)
 		" Find the next enclosing form.
 		call search('\S', 'Wb')
@@ -167,7 +171,8 @@ if exists("*searchpairpos")
 		call cursor(nextParen)
 
 		call search('\S', 'W')
-		if g:clojure_special_indent_words =~ '\<' . s:CurrentWord() . '\>'
+		let w = s:StripNamespaceAndMacroChars(s:CurrentWord())
+		if g:clojure_special_indent_words =~# '\V\<' . w . '\>'
 			return 1
 		endif
 
@@ -273,9 +278,9 @@ if exists("*searchpairpos")
 		" metacharacters.
 		"
 		" e.g. clojure.core/defn and #'defn should both indent like defn.
-		let ww = substitute(w, "\\v%(.*/|[#'`~@^,]*)(.*)", '\1', '')
+		let ww = s:StripNamespaceAndMacroChars(w)
 
-		if &lispwords =~ '\V\<' . ww . '\>'
+		if &lispwords =~# '\V\<' . ww . '\>'
 			return paren[1] + &shiftwidth - 1
 		endif
 
@@ -307,85 +312,6 @@ else
 
 endif
 
-" Specially indented symbols from clojure.core and clojure.test.
-"
-" Clojure symbols are indented in the defn style when they:
-"
-"   * Define vars and anonymous functions
-"   * Create new lexical scopes or scopes with altered environments
-"   * Create conditional branches from a predicate function or value
-"
-" The arglists for these functions are generally in the form of [x & body];
-" Functions that accept a flat list of forms do not treat the first argument
-" specially and hence are not indented specially.
-
-" Definitions
-setlocal lispwords=
-setlocal lispwords+=bound-fn
-setlocal lispwords+=def
-setlocal lispwords+=definline
-setlocal lispwords+=definterface
-setlocal lispwords+=defmacro
-setlocal lispwords+=defmethod
-setlocal lispwords+=defmulti
-setlocal lispwords+=defn
-setlocal lispwords+=defn-
-setlocal lispwords+=defonce
-setlocal lispwords+=defprotocol
-setlocal lispwords+=defrecord
-setlocal lispwords+=defstruct
-setlocal lispwords+=deftest " clojure.test
-setlocal lispwords+=deftest- " clojure.test
-setlocal lispwords+=deftype
-setlocal lispwords+=extend
-setlocal lispwords+=extend-protocol
-setlocal lispwords+=extend-type
-setlocal lispwords+=fn
-setlocal lispwords+=ns
-setlocal lispwords+=proxy
-setlocal lispwords+=reify
-setlocal lispwords+=set-test " clojure.test
-
-" Binding forms
-setlocal lispwords+=as->
-setlocal lispwords+=binding
-setlocal lispwords+=doall
-setlocal lispwords+=dorun
-setlocal lispwords+=doseq
-setlocal lispwords+=dotimes
-setlocal lispwords+=doto
-setlocal lispwords+=for
-setlocal lispwords+=if-let
-setlocal lispwords+=let
-setlocal lispwords+=letfn
-setlocal lispwords+=locking
-setlocal lispwords+=loop
-setlocal lispwords+=testing " clojure.test
-setlocal lispwords+=when-first
-setlocal lispwords+=when-let
-setlocal lispwords+=with-bindings
-setlocal lispwords+=with-in-str
-setlocal lispwords+=with-local-vars
-setlocal lispwords+=with-open
-setlocal lispwords+=with-precision
-setlocal lispwords+=with-redefs
-setlocal lispwords+=with-redefs-fn
-setlocal lispwords+=with-test " clojure.test
-
-" Conditional branching
-setlocal lispwords+=case
-setlocal lispwords+=cond->
-setlocal lispwords+=cond->>
-setlocal lispwords+=condp
-setlocal lispwords+=if
-setlocal lispwords+=if-not
-setlocal lispwords+=when
-setlocal lispwords+=when-not
-setlocal lispwords+=while
-
-" Exception handling
-setlocal lispwords+=catch
-
 let &cpo = s:save_cpo
 unlet! s:save_cpo
 

runtime/indent/go.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+" Vim indent file
+" Language:	Go
+" Maintainer:	David Barnett (https://github.com/google/vim-ft-go)
+" Last Change:	2014 Aug 16
+"
+" TODO:
+" - function invocations split across lines
+" - general line splits (line ends in an operator)
+
+if exists('b:did_indent')
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_indent = 1
+
+" C indentation is too far off useful, mainly due to Go's := operator.
+" Let's just define our own.
+setlocal nolisp
+setlocal autoindent
+setlocal indentexpr=GoIndent(v:lnum)
+setlocal indentkeys+=<:>,0=},0=)
+
+if exists('*GoIndent')
+  finish
+endif
+
+" The shiftwidth() function is relatively new.
+" Don't require it to exist.
+if exists('*shiftwidth')
+  function s:sw() abort
+    return shiftwidth()
+  endfunction
+else
+  function s:sw() abort
+    return &shiftwidth
+  endfunction
+endif
+
+function! GoIndent(lnum)
+  let l:prevlnum = prevnonblank(a:lnum-1)
+  if l:prevlnum == 0
+    " top of file
+    return 0
+  endif
+
+  " grab the previous and current line, stripping comments.
+  let l:prevl = substitute(getline(l:prevlnum), '//.*$', '', '')
+  let l:thisl = substitute(getline(a:lnum), '//.*$', '', '')
+  let l:previ = indent(l:prevlnum)
+
+  let l:ind = l:previ
+
+  if l:prevl =~ '[({]\s*$'
+    " previous line opened a block
+    let l:ind += s:sw()
+  endif
+  if l:prevl =~# '^\s*\(case .*\|default\):$'
+    " previous line is part of a switch statement
+    let l:ind += s:sw()
+  endif
+  " TODO: handle if the previous line is a label.
+
+  if l:thisl =~ '^\s*[)}]'
+    " this line closed a block
+    let l:ind -= s:sw()
+  endif
+
+  " Colons are tricky.
+  " We want to outdent if it's part of a switch ("case foo:" or "default:").
+  " We ignore trying to deal with jump labels because (a) they're rare, and
+  " (b) they're hard to disambiguate from a composite literal key.
+  if l:thisl =~# '^\s*\(case .*\|default\):$'
+    let l:ind -= s:sw()
+  endif
+
+  return l:ind
+endfunction
+
+" vim: sw=2 sts=2 et

runtime/indent/j.vim

@@ -1,37 +1,50 @@
 " Vim indent file
 " Language:	J
 " Maintainer:	David Bürgin <676c7473@gmail.com>
-" Last Change:	2013-09-21
+" URL:		https://github.com/glts/vim-j
+" Last Change:	2014-04-05
 
-if exists("b:did_indent")
+if exists('b:did_indent')
   finish
 endif
 let b:did_indent = 1
 
 setlocal indentexpr=GetJIndent()
-setlocal indentkeys-=0{,0},\:,0#
-setlocal indentkeys+=0),=case.,=catch.,=catchd.,=catcht.,=do.,=else.,=elseif.,=end.,=fcase.
+setlocal indentkeys-=0{,0},:,0#
+setlocal indentkeys+=0),0<:>,=case.,=catch.,=catchd.,=catcht.,=do.,=else.,=elseif.,=end.,=fcase.
 
-let b:undo_indent = "setl indk< inde<"
+let b:undo_indent = 'setlocal indentkeys< indentexpr<'
 
-if exists("*GetJIndent")
+if exists('*GetJIndent')
   finish
 endif
 
-function GetJIndent()
+" If g:j_indent_definitions is true, the bodies of explicit definitions of
+" adverbs, conjunctions, and verbs will be indented. Default is false (0).
+if !exists('g:j_indent_definitions')
+  let g:j_indent_definitions = 0
+endif
+
+function GetJIndent() abort
   let prevlnum = prevnonblank(v:lnum-1)
   if prevlnum == 0
     return 0
   endif
-
   let indent = indent(prevlnum)
-  if getline(prevlnum) =~# '^\s*\%(case\|catch[dt]\=\|do\|else\%(if\)\=\|fcase\|for\%(_\a\k*\)\=\|if\|select\|try\|whil\%(e\|st\)\)\.'
-    if getline(prevlnum) !~# '\<end\.'
-      let indent += &shiftwidth
-    endif
+  let prevline = getline(prevlnum)
+  if prevline =~# '^\s*\%(case\|catch[dt]\=\|do\|else\%(if\)\=\|fcase\|for\%(_\a\k*\)\=\|if\|select\|try\|whil\%(e\|st\)\)\.\%(\%(\<end\.\)\@!.\)*$'
+    " Increase indentation after an initial control word that starts or
+    " continues a block and is not terminated by "end."
+    let indent += shiftwidth()
+  elseif g:j_indent_definitions && (prevline =~# '\<\%([1-4]\|13\|adverb\|conjunction\|verb\|monad\|dyad\)\s\+\%(:\s*0\|def\s\+0\|define\)\>' || prevline =~# '^\s*:\s*$')
+    " Increase indentation in explicit definitions of adverbs, conjunctions,
+    " and verbs
+    let indent += shiftwidth()
   endif
-  if getline(v:lnum) =~# '^\s*\%(case\|catch[dt]\=\|do\|else\%(if\)\=\|end\|fcase\)\.'
-    let indent -= &shiftwidth
+  " Decrease indentation in lines that start with either control words that
+  " continue or end a block, or the special items ")" and ":"
+  if getline(v:lnum) =~# '^\s*\%()\|:\|\%(case\|catch[dt]\=\|do\|else\%(if\)\=\|end\|fcase\)\.\)'
+    let indent -= shiftwidth()
   endif
   return indent
 endfunction

runtime/indent/json.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+" Vim indent file
+" Language:		JSON
+" Maintainer:		David Barnett <daviebdawg+vim@gmail.com>
+" Last Change:		2014 Jul 16
+
+if exists('b:did_indent')
+   finish
+endif
+
+" JSON is a subset of JavaScript. JavaScript indenting should work fine.
+runtime! indent/javascript.vim
+
+let b:did_indent = 1

runtime/indent/php.vim

@@ -3,8 +3,8 @@
 " Author:	John Wellesz <John.wellesz (AT) teaser (DOT) fr>
 " URL:		http://www.2072productions.com/vim/indent/php.vim
 " Home:		https://github.com/2072/PHP-Indenting-for-VIm
-" Last Change:	2014 Jan 21
-" Version:	1.39
+" Last Change:	2014 April 3rd
+" Version:	1.49
 "
 "
 "	Type :help php-indent for available options
@@ -39,7 +39,8 @@
 "
 "	or simply 'let' the option PHP_removeCRwhenUnix to 1 and the script will
 "	silently remove them when VIM load this script (at each bufread).
-"
+
+
 
 if exists("b:did_indent")
     finish
@@ -126,14 +127,26 @@ if exists("*GetPhpIndent")
     finish " XXX -- comment this line for easy dev
 endif
 
+
+let s:notPhpHereDoc = '\%(break\|return\|continue\|exit\|die\|else\)'
+let s:blockstart = '\%(\%(\%(}\s*\)\=else\%(\s\+\)\=\)\=if\>\|\%(}\s*\)\?else\>\|do\>\|while\>\|switch\>\|case\>\|default\>\|for\%(each\)\=\>\|declare\>\|class\>\|trait\>\|use\>\|interface\>\|abstract\>\|final\>\|try\>\|\%(}\s*\)\=catch\>\|\%(}\s*\)\=finally\>\)'
+let s:functionDecl = '\<function\>\%(\s\+[a-zA-Z_\x7f-\xff][a-zA-Z0-9_\x7f-\xff]*\)\=\s*(.*'
 let s:endline= '\s*\%(//.*\|#.*\|/\*.*\*/\s*\)\=$'
+let s:terminated = '\%(\%(;\%(\s*\%(?>\|}\)\)\=\|<<<''\=\a\w*''\=$\|^\s*}\)'.s:endline.'\)\|^[^''"`]*[''"`]$'
 let s:PHP_startindenttag = '<?\%(.*?>\)\@!\|<script[^>]*>\%(.*<\/script>\)\@!'
 
 
+
+let s:escapeDebugStops = 0
 function! DebugPrintReturn(scriptLine)
 
-    echo "debug:" . a:scriptLine
-    call getchar()
+    if ! s:escapeDebugStops 
+	echo "debug:" . a:scriptLine
+	let c = getchar()
+	if c == "\<Del>"
+	    let s:escapeDebugStops = 1
+	end
+    endif
 
 endfunction
 
@@ -190,6 +203,11 @@ function! GetLastRealCodeLNum(startline) " {{{
 	    while getline(lnum) !~? tofind && lnum > 1
 		let lnum = lnum - 1
 	    endwhile
+	elseif lastline =~ '^[^''"`]*[''"`][;,]'.s:endline
+	    let tofind=substitute( lastline, '^.*\([''"`]\)[;,].*$', '^[^\1]\\+[\1]$', '')
+	    while getline(lnum) !~? tofind && lnum > 1
+		let lnum = lnum - 1
+	    endwhile
 	else
 	    break
 	endif
@@ -211,9 +229,9 @@ function! Skippmatch2()
     let line = getline(".")
 
     if line =~ "\\([\"']\\).*/\\*.*\\1" || line =~ '\%(//\|#\).*/\*'
-        return 1
+	return 1
     else
-        return 0
+	return 0
     endif
 endfun
 
@@ -226,9 +244,23 @@ function! Skippmatch()	" {{{
     endif
 endfun " }}}
 
-function! FindOpenBracket(lnum) " {{{
+function! FindOpenBracket(lnum, blockStarter) " {{{
     call cursor(a:lnum, 1)
-    return searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW', 'Skippmatch()')
+    let line = searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW', 'Skippmatch()')
+
+    if a:blockStarter == 1
+	while line > 1 
+	    let linec = getline(line)
+
+	    if linec =~ s:terminated || linec =~ '^\s*\%(' . s:blockstart . '\)\|'. s:functionDecl . s:endline
+		break
+	    endif
+
+	    let line = GetLastRealCodeLNum(line - 1)
+	endwhile
+    endif
+
+    return line
 endfun " }}}
 
 function! FindTheIfOfAnElse (lnum, StopAfterFirstPrevElse) " {{{
@@ -248,7 +280,7 @@ function! FindTheIfOfAnElse (lnum, StopAfterFirstPrevElse) " {{{
     endif
 
     if getline(beforeelse) =~ '^\s*}'
-	let beforeelse = FindOpenBracket(beforeelse)
+	let beforeelse = FindOpenBracket(beforeelse, 0)
 
 	if getline(beforeelse) =~ '^\s*{'
 	    let beforeelse = GetLastRealCodeLNum(beforeelse - 1)
@@ -285,13 +317,13 @@ function! FindTheSwitchIndent (lnum) " {{{
 	return indent(1) - &sw * b:PHP_vintage_case_default_indent
     end
 
-    if getline(test) =~ '^\s*}'
-	let test = FindOpenBracket(test)
+    while getline(test) =~ '^\s*}' && test > 1
+	let test = GetLastRealCodeLNum(FindOpenBracket(test, 0) - 1)
 
-	if getline(test) =~ '^\s*{'
-	    let test = GetLastRealCodeLNum(GetLastRealCodeLNum(test - 1) - 1)
+	if getline(test) =~ '^\s*switch\>'
+	    let test = GetLastRealCodeLNum(test - 1)
 	endif
-    endif
+    endwhile
 
     if getline(test) =~# '^\s*switch\>'
 	return indent(test)
@@ -308,7 +340,7 @@ function! IslinePHP (lnum, tofind) " {{{
     let cline = getline(a:lnum)
 
     if a:tofind==""
-	let tofind = "^\\s*[\"']*\\s*\\zs\\S"
+	let tofind = "^\\s*[\"'`]*\\s*\\zs\\S"
     else
 	let tofind = a:tofind
     endif
@@ -319,6 +351,14 @@ function! IslinePHP (lnum, tofind) " {{{
 
     let synname = synIDattr(synID(a:lnum, coltotest, 0), "name")
 
+    if synname == 'phpStringSingle' || synname == 'phpStringDouble' || synname == 'phpBacktick'
+	if cline !~ '^\s*[''"`]'
+	    return ""
+	else
+	    return synname
+	end
+    end
+
     if get(s:SynPHPMatchGroups, synname) || synname =~ '^php' ||  synname =~? '^javaScript'
 	return synname
     else
@@ -326,9 +366,6 @@ function! IslinePHP (lnum, tofind) " {{{
     endif
 endfunction " }}}
 
-let s:notPhpHereDoc = '\%(break\|return\|continue\|exit\|die\|else\)'
-let s:blockstart = '\%(\%(\%(}\s*\)\=else\%(\s\+\)\=\)\=if\>\|else\>\|while\>\|switch\>\|case\>\|default\>\|for\%(each\)\=\>\|declare\>\|class\>\|interface\>\|abstract\>\|try\>\|catch\>\)'
-
 let s:autoresetoptions = 0
 if ! s:autoresetoptions
     let s:autoresetoptions = 1
@@ -344,7 +381,6 @@ function! ResetPhpOptions()
 	    setlocal formatoptions+=q
 	    setlocal formatoptions+=r
 	    setlocal formatoptions+=o
-	    setlocal formatoptions+=w
 	    setlocal formatoptions+=c
 	    setlocal formatoptions+=b
 	endif
@@ -443,6 +479,7 @@ function! GetPhpIndent()
     " Test if we are indenting PHP code {{{
     let lnum = prevnonblank(v:lnum - 1)
     let last_line = getline(lnum)
+    let endline= s:endline
 
     if b:InPHPcode_tofind!=""
 	if cline =~? b:InPHPcode_tofind
@@ -483,6 +520,9 @@ function! GetPhpIndent()
 		let b:InPHPcode_and_script = 1
 	    endif
 
+	elseif last_line =~ '^[^''"`]\+[''"`]$' " a string identifier with nothing after it and no other string identifier before
+	    let b:InPHPcode = 0
+	    let b:InPHPcode_tofind = substitute( last_line, '^.*\([''"`]\).*$', '^[^\1]*\1[;,]$', '')
 	elseif last_line =~? '<<<''\=\a\w*''\=$'
 	    let b:InPHPcode = 0
 	    let b:InPHPcode_tofind = substitute( last_line, '^.*<<<''\=\(\a\w*\)''\=$', '^\\s*\1;\\=$', '')
@@ -545,7 +585,7 @@ function! GetPhpIndent()
 	return 0
     endif
 
-    if cline =~? '^\s*\a\w*;$\|^\a\w*$' && cline !~? s:notPhpHereDoc
+    if cline =~? '^\s*\a\w*;$\|^\a\w*$\|^\s*[''"`][;,]' && cline !~? s:notPhpHereDoc
 	return 0
     endif " }}}
 
@@ -555,7 +595,6 @@ function! GetPhpIndent()
 
     let last_line = getline(lnum)
     let ind = indent(lnum)
-    let endline= s:endline
 
     if ind==0 && b:PHP_default_indenting
 	let ind = b:PHP_default_indenting
@@ -567,7 +606,7 @@ function! GetPhpIndent()
 
 
     if cline =~ '^\s*}\%(}}\)\@!'
-	let ind = indent(FindOpenBracket(v:lnum))
+	let ind = indent(FindOpenBracket(v:lnum, 1))
 	let b:PHP_CurrentIndentLevel = b:PHP_default_indenting
 	return ind
     endif
@@ -599,7 +638,7 @@ function! GetPhpIndent()
 
     let LastLineClosed = 0
 
-    let terminated = '\%(;\%(\s*\%(?>\|}\)\)\=\|<<<''\=\a\w*''\=$\|^\s*}\)'.endline
+    let terminated = s:terminated
 
     let unstated   = '\%(^\s*'.s:blockstart.'.*)\|\%(//.*\)\@<!\<e'.'lse\>\)'.endline
 
@@ -614,7 +653,7 @@ function! GetPhpIndent()
 
 	while last_line_num > 1
 
-	    if previous_line =~ '^\s*\%(' . s:blockstart . '\|\%([a-zA-Z]\s*\)*function\)'
+	    if previous_line =~ terminated || previous_line =~ '^\s*\%(' . s:blockstart . '\)\|'. s:functionDecl . endline
 
 		let ind = indent(last_line_num)
 
@@ -625,7 +664,7 @@ function! GetPhpIndent()
 		return ind
 	    endif
 
-	    let last_line_num = last_line_num - 1
+	    let last_line_num = GetLastRealCodeLNum(last_line_num - 1)
 	    let previous_line = getline(last_line_num)
 	endwhile
 
@@ -638,22 +677,29 @@ function! GetPhpIndent()
 	let last_line_num = lnum
 	let LastLineClosed = 1
 
+	let isSingleLineBlock = 0
 	while 1
-	    if previous_line =~ '^\s*}\|;\s*}'.endline " XXX
+	    if ! isSingleLineBlock && previous_line =~ '^\s*}\|;\s*}'.endline " XXX
 
 		call cursor(last_line_num, 1)
-		call search('}\|;\s*}'.endline, 'cW')
+		if previous_line !~ '^}'
+		    call search('}\|;\s*}'.endline, 'W')
+		end
 		let oldLastLine = last_line_num
 		let last_line_num = searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW', 'Skippmatch()')
 
-		if oldLastLine == last_line_num || getline(last_line_num) =~ '^\s*{'
+		if getline(last_line_num) =~ '^\s*{'
 		    let last_line_num = GetLastRealCodeLNum(last_line_num - 1)
+		elseif oldLastLine == last_line_num
+		    let isSingleLineBlock = 1
+		    continue
 		endif
 
 		let previous_line = getline(last_line_num)
 
 		continue
 	    else
+		let isSingleLineBlock = 0
 
 		if getline(last_line_num) =~# '^\s*else\%(if\)\=\>'
 		    let last_line_num = FindTheIfOfAnElse(last_line_num, 0)
@@ -711,7 +757,12 @@ function! GetPhpIndent()
 
 	if last_line =~# '[{(\[]'.endline || last_line =~? '\h\w*\s*(.*,$' && AntepenultimateLine !~ '[,(]'.endline
 
-	    if !b:PHP_BracesAtCodeLevel || last_line !~# '^\s*{'
+	    let dontIndent = 0
+	    if last_line =~ '\S\+\s*{'.endline && last_line !~ '^\s*\%(' . s:blockstart . '\)\|'. s:functionDecl . s:endline
+		let dontIndent = 1
+	    endif
+
+	    if !dontIndent && (!b:PHP_BracesAtCodeLevel || last_line !~# '^\s*{')
 		let ind = ind + &sw
 	    endif
 
@@ -723,7 +774,7 @@ function! GetPhpIndent()
 
 	elseif last_line =~ '\S\+\s*),'.endline
 	    call cursor(lnum, 1)
-	    call search('),'.endline, 'W')
+	    call search('),'.endline, 'W') " line never begins with ) so no need for 'c' flag
 	    let openedparent = searchpair('(', '', ')', 'bW', 'Skippmatch()')
 	    if openedparent != lnum
 		let ind = indent(openedparent)

runtime/indent/rhelp.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+" Vim indent file
+" Language:	R Documentation (Help), *.Rd
+" Author:	Jakson Alves de Aquino <jalvesaq@gmail.com>
+" Last Change:	Wed Jul 09, 2014  07:34PM
+
+
+" Only load this indent file when no other was loaded.
+if exists("b:did_indent")
+  finish
+endif
+runtime indent/r.vim
+let s:RIndent = function(substitute(&indentexpr, "()", "", ""))
+let b:did_indent = 1
+
+setlocal indentkeys=0{,0},:,!^F,o,O,e
+setlocal indentexpr=GetRHelpIndent()
+
+" Only define the function once.
+if exists("*GetRHelpIndent")
+  finish
+endif
+
+setlocal noautoindent
+setlocal nocindent
+setlocal nosmartindent
+setlocal nolisp
+
+setlocal indentkeys=0{,0},:,!^F,o,O,e
+setlocal indentexpr=GetCorrectRHelpIndent()
+
+function s:SanitizeRHelpLine(line)
+  let newline = substitute(a:line, '\\\\', "x", "g")
+  let newline = substitute(newline, '\\{', "x", "g")
+  let newline = substitute(newline, '\\}', "x", "g")
+  let newline = substitute(newline, '\\%', "x", "g")
+  let newline = substitute(newline, '%.*', "", "")
+  let newline = substitute(newline, '\s*$', "", "")
+  return newline
+endfunction
+
+function GetRHelpIndent()
+
+  let clnum = line(".")    " current line
+  if clnum == 1
+    return 0
+  endif
+  let cline = getline(clnum)
+
+  if cline =~ '^\s*}\s*$'
+    let i = clnum
+    let bb = -1
+    while bb != 0 && i > 1
+      let i -= 1
+      let line = s:SanitizeRHelpLine(getline(i))
+      let line2 = substitute(line, "{", "", "g")
+      let openb = strlen(line) - strlen(line2)
+      let line3 = substitute(line2, "}", "", "g")
+      let closeb = strlen(line2) - strlen(line3)
+      let bb += openb - closeb
+    endwhile
+    return indent(i)
+  endif
+
+  if cline =~ '^\s*#ifdef\>' || cline =~ '^\s*#endif\>'
+    return 0
+  endif
+
+  let lnum = clnum - 1
+  let line = getline(lnum)
+  if line =~ '^\s*#ifdef\>' || line =~ '^\s*#endif\>'
+    let lnum -= 1
+    let line = getline(lnum)
+  endif
+  while lnum > 1 && (line =~ '^\s*$' || line =~ '^#ifdef' || line =~ '^#endif')
+    let lnum -= 1
+    let line = getline(lnum)
+  endwhile
+  if lnum == 1
+    return 0
+  endif
+  let line = s:SanitizeRHelpLine(line)
+  let line2 = substitute(line, "{", "", "g")
+  let openb = strlen(line) - strlen(line2)
+  let line3 = substitute(line2, "}", "", "g")
+  let closeb = strlen(line2) - strlen(line3)
+  let bb = openb - closeb
+
+  let ind = indent(lnum) + (bb * &sw)
+
+  if line =~ '^\s*}\s*$'
+    let ind = indent(lnum)
+  endif
+
+  if ind < 0
+    return 0
+  endif
+
+  return ind
+endfunction
+
+function GetCorrectRHelpIndent()
+  let lastsection = search('^\\[a-z]*{', "bncW")
+  let secname = getline(lastsection)
+  if secname =~ '^\\usage{' || secname =~ '^\\examples{' || secname =~ '^\\dontshow{' || secname =~ '^\\dontrun{' || secname =~ '^\\donttest{' || secname =~ '^\\testonly{' || secname =~ '^\\method{.*}{.*}('
+    return s:RIndent()
+  else
+    return GetRHelpIndent()
+  endif
+endfunction
+
+" vim: sw=2

runtime/indent/rmd.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+" Vim indent file
+" Language:	Rmd
+" Author:	Jakson Alves de Aquino <jalvesaq@gmail.com>
+" Last Change:	Wed Jul 09, 2014  07:33PM
+
+
+" Only load this indent file when no other was loaded.
+if exists("b:did_indent")
+  finish
+endif
+runtime indent/r.vim
+let s:RIndent = function(substitute(&indentexpr, "()", "", ""))
+let b:did_indent = 1
+
+setlocal indentkeys=0{,0},:,!^F,o,O,e
+setlocal indentexpr=GetRmdIndent()
+
+if exists("*GetRmdIndent")
+  finish
+endif
+
+function GetMdIndent()
+  let pline = getline(v:lnum - 1)
+  let cline = getline(v:lnum)
+  if prevnonblank(v:lnum - 1) < v:lnum - 1 || cline =~ '^\s*[-\+\*]\s' || cline =~ '^\s*\d\+\.\s\+'
+    return indent(v:lnum)
+  elseif pline =~ '^\s*[-\+\*]\s'
+    return indent(v:lnum - 1) + 2
+  elseif pline =~ '^\s*\d\+\.\s\+'
+    return indent(v:lnum - 1) + 3
+  endif
+  return indent(prevnonblank(v:lnum - 1))
+endfunction
+
+function GetRmdIndent()
+  if getline(".") =~ '^```{r .*}$' || getline(".") =~ '^```$'
+    return 0
+  endif
+  if search('^```{r', "bncW") > search('^```$', "bncW")
+    return s:RIndent()
+  else
+    return GetMdIndent()
+  endif
+endfunction
+
+" vim: sw=2

runtime/indent/rnoweb.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+" Vim indent file
+" Language:	Rnoweb
+" Author:	Jakson Alves de Aquino <jalvesaq@gmail.com>
+" Last Change:	Wed Jul 09, 2014  07:28PM
+
+
+" Only load this indent file when no other was loaded.
+if exists("b:did_indent")
+  finish
+endif
+runtime indent/tex.vim
+let s:TeXIndent = function(substitute(&indentexpr, "()", "", ""))
+unlet b:did_indent
+runtime indent/r.vim
+let s:RIndent = function(substitute(&indentexpr, "()", "", ""))
+let b:did_indent = 1
+
+setlocal indentkeys=0{,0},!^F,o,O,e,},=\bibitem,=\item
+setlocal indentexpr=GetRnowebIndent()
+
+if exists("*GetRnowebIndent")
+  finish
+endif
+
+function GetRnowebIndent()
+  if getline(".") =~ "^<<.*>>=$"
+    return 0
+  endif
+  if search("^<<", "bncW") > search("^@", "bncW")
+    return s:RIndent()
+  endif
+  return s:TeXIndent()
+endfunction
+
+" vim: sw=2

runtime/indent/rrst.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+" Vim indent file
+" Language:	Rrst
+" Author:	Jakson Alves de Aquino <jalvesaq@gmail.com>
+" Last Change:	Wed Jul 09, 2014  07:33PM
+
+
+" Only load this indent file when no other was loaded.
+if exists("b:did_indent")
+  finish
+endif
+runtime indent/r.vim
+let s:RIndent = function(substitute(&indentexpr, "()", "", ""))
+let b:did_indent = 1
+
+setlocal indentkeys=0{,0},:,!^F,o,O,e
+setlocal indentexpr=GetRrstIndent()
+
+if exists("*GetRrstIndent")
+  finish
+endif
+
+function GetRstIndent()
+  let pline = getline(v:lnum - 1)
+  let cline = getline(v:lnum)
+  if prevnonblank(v:lnum - 1) < v:lnum - 1 || cline =~ '^\s*[-\+\*]\s' || cline =~ '^\s*\d\+\.\s\+'
+    return indent(v:lnum)
+  elseif pline =~ '^\s*[-\+\*]\s'
+    return indent(v:lnum - 1) + 2
+  elseif pline =~ '^\s*\d\+\.\s\+'
+    return indent(v:lnum - 1) + 3
+  endif
+  return indent(prevnonblank(v:lnum - 1))
+endfunction
+
+function GetRrstIndent()
+  if getline(".") =~ '^\.\. {r .*}$' || getline(".") =~ '^\.\. \.\.$'
+    return 0
+  endif
+  if search('^\.\. {r', "bncW") > search('^\.\. \.\.$', "bncW")
+    return s:RIndent()
+  else
+    return GetRstIndent()
+  endif
+endfunction
+
+" vim: sw=2

runtime/indent/sh.vim

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " Language:         Shell Script
 " Maintainer:       Peter Aronoff <telemachus@arpinum.org>
 " Original Author:  Nikolai Weibull <now@bitwi.se>
-" Latest Revision:  2013-11-28
+" Latest Revision:  2014-08-22
 
 if exists("b:did_indent")
   finish
@@ -91,7 +91,9 @@ function! GetShIndent()
     if s:is_case(pine)
       let ind = indent(lnum) + s:indent_value('case-labels')
     else
-      let ind -= s:indent_value('case-statements') - s:indent_value('case-breaks')
+      let ind -= (s:is_case_label(pine, lnum) && s:is_case_ended(pine) ?
+                  \ 0 : s:indent_value('case-statements')) -
+                  \ s:indent_value('case-breaks')
     endif
   elseif s:is_case_break(line)
     let ind -= s:indent_value('case-breaks')

runtime/indent/systemverilog.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,230 @@
+" Vim indent file
+" Language:    SystemVerilog
+" Maintainer:  kocha <kocha.lsifrontend@gmail.com>
+" Last Change: 12-Aug-2013. 
+
+" Only load this indent file when no other was loaded.
+if exists("b:did_indent")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_indent = 1
+
+setlocal indentexpr=SystemVerilogIndent()
+setlocal indentkeys=!^F,o,O,0),0},=begin,=end,=join,=endcase,=join_any,=join_none
+setlocal indentkeys+==endmodule,=endfunction,=endtask,=endspecify
+setlocal indentkeys+==endclass,=endpackage,=endsequence,=endclocking
+setlocal indentkeys+==endinterface,=endgroup,=endprogram,=endproperty,=endchecker
+setlocal indentkeys+==`else,=`endif
+
+" Only define the function once.
+if exists("*SystemVerilogIndent")
+  finish
+endif
+
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo&vim
+
+function SystemVerilogIndent()
+
+  if exists('b:systemverilog_indent_width')
+    let offset = b:systemverilog_indent_width
+  else
+    let offset = &sw
+  endif
+  if exists('b:systemverilog_indent_modules')
+    let indent_modules = offset
+  else
+    let indent_modules = 0
+  endif
+
+  " Find a non-blank line above the current line.
+  let lnum = prevnonblank(v:lnum - 1)
+
+  " At the start of the file use zero indent.
+  if lnum == 0
+    return 0
+  endif
+
+  let lnum2 = prevnonblank(lnum - 1)
+  let curr_line  = getline(v:lnum)
+  let last_line  = getline(lnum)
+  let last_line2 = getline(lnum2)
+  let ind  = indent(lnum)
+  let ind2 = indent(lnum - 1)
+  let offset_comment1 = 1
+  " Define the condition of an open statement
+  "   Exclude the match of //, /* or */
+  let sv_openstat = '\(\<or\>\|\([*/]\)\@<![*(,{><+-/%^&|!=?:]\([*/]\)\@!\)'
+  " Define the condition when the statement ends with a one-line comment
+  let sv_comment = '\(//.*\|/\*.*\*/\s*\)'
+  if exists('b:verilog_indent_verbose')
+    let vverb_str = 'INDENT VERBOSE:'
+    let vverb = 1
+  else
+    let vverb = 0
+  endif
+
+  " Indent accoding to last line
+  " End of multiple-line comment
+  if last_line =~ '\*/\s*$' && last_line !~ '/\*.\{-}\*/'
+    let ind = ind - offset_comment1
+    if vverb
+      echo vverb_str "De-indent after a multiple-line comment."
+    endif
+
+  " Indent after if/else/for/case/always/initial/specify/fork blocks
+  elseif last_line =~ '`\@<!\<\(if\|else\)\>' ||
+    \ last_line =~ '^\s*\<\(for\|case\%[[zx]]\|do\|foreach\|randcase\)\>' ||
+    \ last_line =~ '^\s*\<\(always\|always_comb\|always_ff\|always_latch\)\>' ||
+    \ last_line =~ '^\s*\<\(initial\|specify\|fork\|final\)\>'
+    if last_line !~ '\(;\|\<end\>\)\s*' . sv_comment . '*$' ||
+      \ last_line =~ '\(//\|/\*\).*\(;\|\<end\>\)\s*' . sv_comment . '*$'
+      let ind = ind + offset
+      if vverb | echo vverb_str "Indent after a block statement." | endif
+    endif
+  " Indent after function/task/class/package/sequence/clocking/
+  " interface/covergroup/property/checkerprogram blocks
+  elseif last_line =~ '^\s*\<\(function\|task\|class\|package\)\>' ||
+    \ last_line =~ '^\s*\<\(sequence\|clocking\|interface\)\>' ||
+    \ last_line =~ '^\s*\(\w\+\s*:\)\=\s*\<covergroup\>' ||
+    \ last_line =~ '^\s*\<\(property\|checker\|program\)\>'
+    if last_line !~ '\<end\>\s*' . sv_comment . '*$' ||
+      \ last_line =~ '\(//\|/\*\).*\(;\|\<end\>\)\s*' . sv_comment . '*$'
+      let ind = ind + offset
+      if vverb
+	echo vverb_str "Indent after function/task/class block statement."
+      endif
+    endif
+
+  " Indent after module/function/task/specify/fork blocks
+  elseif last_line =~ '^\s*\(\<extern\>\s*\)\=\<module\>'
+    let ind = ind + indent_modules
+    if vverb && indent_modules
+      echo vverb_str "Indent after module statement."
+    endif
+    if last_line =~ '[(,]\s*' . sv_comment . '*$' &&
+      \ last_line !~ '\(//\|/\*\).*[(,]\s*' . sv_comment . '*$'
+      let ind = ind + offset
+      if vverb
+	echo vverb_str "Indent after a multiple-line module statement."
+      endif
+    endif
+
+  " Indent after a 'begin' statement
+  elseif last_line =~ '\(\<begin\>\)\(\s*:\s*\w\+\)*' . sv_comment . '*$' &&
+    \ last_line !~ '\(//\|/\*\).*\(\<begin\>\)' &&
+    \ ( last_line2 !~ sv_openstat . '\s*' . sv_comment . '*$' ||
+    \ last_line2 =~ '^\s*[^=!]\+\s*:\s*' . sv_comment . '*$' )
+    let ind = ind + offset
+    if vverb | echo vverb_str "Indent after begin statement." | endif
+
+  " Indent after a '{' or a '('
+  elseif last_line =~ '[{(]' . sv_comment . '*$' &&
+    \ last_line !~ '\(//\|/\*\).*[{(]' &&
+    \ ( last_line2 !~ sv_openstat . '\s*' . sv_comment . '*$' ||
+    \ last_line2 =~ '^\s*[^=!]\+\s*:\s*' . sv_comment . '*$' )
+    let ind = ind + offset
+    if vverb | echo vverb_str "Indent after begin statement." | endif
+
+  " De-indent for the end of one-line block
+  elseif ( last_line !~ '\<begin\>' ||
+    \ last_line =~ '\(//\|/\*\).*\<begin\>' ) &&
+    \ last_line2 =~ '\<\(`\@<!if\|`\@<!else\|for\|always\|initial\|do\|foreach\|final\)\>.*' .
+      \ sv_comment . '*$' &&
+    \ last_line2 !~ '\(//\|/\*\).*\<\(`\@<!if\|`\@<!else\|for\|always\|initial\|do\|foreach\|final\)\>' &&
+    \ last_line2 !~ sv_openstat . '\s*' . sv_comment . '*$' &&
+    \ ( last_line2 !~ '\<begin\>' ||
+    \ last_line2 =~ '\(//\|/\*\).*\<begin\>' )
+    let ind = ind - offset
+    if vverb
+      echo vverb_str "De-indent after the end of one-line statement."
+    endif
+
+    " Multiple-line statement (including case statement)
+    " Open statement
+    "   Ident the first open line
+    elseif  last_line =~ sv_openstat . '\s*' . sv_comment . '*$' &&
+      \ last_line !~ '\(//\|/\*\).*' . sv_openstat . '\s*$' &&
+      \ last_line2 !~ sv_openstat . '\s*' . sv_comment . '*$'
+      let ind = ind + offset
+      if vverb | echo vverb_str "Indent after an open statement." | endif
+
+    " Close statement
+    "   De-indent for an optional close parenthesis and a semicolon, and only
+    "   if there exists precedent non-whitespace char
+    elseif last_line =~ ')*\s*;\s*' . sv_comment . '*$' &&
+      \ last_line !~ '^\s*)*\s*;\s*' . sv_comment . '*$' &&
+      \ last_line !~ '\(//\|/\*\).*\S)*\s*;\s*' . sv_comment . '*$' &&
+      \ ( last_line2 =~ sv_openstat . '\s*' . sv_comment . '*$' &&
+      \ last_line2 !~ ';\s*//.*$') &&
+      \ last_line2 !~ '^\s*' . sv_comment . '$'
+      let ind = ind - offset
+      if vverb | echo vverb_str "De-indent after a close statement." | endif
+
+  " `ifdef and `else
+  elseif last_line =~ '^\s*`\<\(ifdef\|else\)\>'
+    let ind = ind + offset
+    if vverb
+      echo vverb_str "Indent after a `ifdef or `else statement."
+    endif
+
+  endif
+
+  " Re-indent current line
+
+  " De-indent on the end of the block
+  " join/end/endcase/endfunction/endtask/endspecify
+  if curr_line =~ '^\s*\<\(join\|join_any\|join_none\|\|end\|endcase\|while\)\>' ||
+      \ curr_line =~ '^\s*\<\(endfunction\|endtask\|endspecify\|endclass\)\>' ||
+      \ curr_line =~ '^\s*\<\(endpackage\|endsequence\|endclocking\|endinterface\)\>' ||
+      \ curr_line =~ '^\s*\<\(endgroup\|endproperty\|endchecker\|endprogram\)\>' ||
+      \ curr_line =~ '^\s*}'
+    let ind = ind - offset
+    if vverb | echo vverb_str "De-indent the end of a block." | endif
+  elseif curr_line =~ '^\s*\<endmodule\>'
+    let ind = ind - indent_modules
+    if vverb && indent_modules
+      echo vverb_str "De-indent the end of a module."
+    endif
+
+  " De-indent on a stand-alone 'begin'
+  elseif curr_line =~ '^\s*\<begin\>'
+    if last_line !~ '^\s*\<\(function\|task\|specify\|module\|class\|package\)\>' ||
+      \ last_line !~ '^\s*\<\(sequence\|clocking\|interface\|covergroup\)\>' ||
+      \ last_line !~ '^\s*\<\(property\|checker\|program\)\>' &&
+      \ last_line !~ '^\s*\()*\s*;\|)\+\)\s*' . sv_comment . '*$' &&
+      \ ( last_line =~
+      \ '\<\(`\@<!if\|`\@<!else\|for\|case\%[[zx]]\|always\|initial\|do\|foreach\|randcase\|final\)\>' ||
+      \ last_line =~ ')\s*' . sv_comment . '*$' ||
+      \ last_line =~ sv_openstat . '\s*' . sv_comment . '*$' )
+      let ind = ind - offset
+      if vverb
+	echo vverb_str "De-indent a stand alone begin statement."
+      endif
+    endif
+
+  " De-indent after the end of multiple-line statement
+  elseif curr_line =~ '^\s*)' &&
+    \ ( last_line =~ sv_openstat . '\s*' . sv_comment . '*$' ||
+    \ last_line !~ sv_openstat . '\s*' . sv_comment . '*$' &&
+    \ last_line2 =~ sv_openstat . '\s*' . sv_comment . '*$' )
+    let ind = ind - offset
+    if vverb
+      echo vverb_str "De-indent the end of a multiple statement."
+    endif
+
+  " De-indent `else and `endif
+  elseif curr_line =~ '^\s*`\<\(else\|endif\)\>'
+    let ind = ind - offset
+    if vverb | echo vverb_str "De-indent `else and `endif statement." | endif
+
+  endif
+
+  " Return the indention
+  return ind
+endfunction
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save
+
+" vim:sw=2

runtime/indent/vroom.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+" Vim indent file
+" Language:	Vroom (vim testing and executable documentation)
+" Maintainer:	David Barnett (https://github.com/google/vim-ft-vroom)
+" Last Change:	2014 Jul 23
+
+if exists('b:did_indent')
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_indent = 1
+
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo-=C
+
+
+let b:undo_indent = 'setlocal autoindent<'
+
+setlocal autoindent
+
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save

runtime/macros/less.vim

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " Vim script to work like "less"
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2012 May 18
+" Last Change:	2014 May 13
 
 " Avoid loading this file twice, allow the user to define his own script.
 if exists("loaded_less")
@@ -87,6 +87,9 @@ noremap <script> <Space> :call <SID>NextPage()<CR><SID>L
 map <C-V> <Space>
 map f <Space>
 map <C-F> <Space>
+map <PageDown> <Space>
+map <kPageDown> <Space>
+map <S-Down> <Space>
 map z <Space>
 map <Esc><Space> <Space>
 fun! s:NextPage()
@@ -116,10 +119,14 @@ map e <CR>
 map <C-E> <CR>
 map j <CR>
 map <C-J> <CR>
+map <Down> <CR>
 
 " Scroll one page backward
 noremap <script> b <C-B><SID>L
 map <C-B> b
+map <PageUp> b
+map <kPageUp> b
+map <S-Up> b
 map w b
 map <Esc>v b
 
@@ -133,6 +140,7 @@ map y k
 map <C-Y> k
 map <C-P> k
 map <C-K> k
+map <Up> k
 
 " Redraw
 noremap <script> r <C-L><SID>L
@@ -143,11 +151,15 @@ noremap <script> R <C-L><SID>L
 noremap <script> g gg<SID>L
 map < g
 map <Esc>< g
+map <Home> g
+map <kHome> g
 
 " End of file
 noremap <script> G G<SID>L
 map > G
 map <Esc>> G
+map <End> G
+map <kEnd> G
 
 " Go to percentage
 noremap <script> % %<SID>L
@@ -184,6 +196,7 @@ fun! s:Backward()
 endfun
 
 call s:Forward()
+cunmap <CR>
 
 " Quitting
 noremap q :q<CR>
@@ -240,6 +253,18 @@ fun! s:End()
   unmap v
   unmap /
   unmap ?
+  unmap <Up>
+  unmap <Down>
+  unmap <PageDown>
+  unmap <kPageDown>
+  unmap <PageUp>
+  unmap <kPageUp>
+  unmap <S-Down>
+  unmap <S-Up>
+  unmap <Home>
+  unmap <kHome>
+  unmap <End>
+  unmap <kEnd>
 endfun
 
 " vim: sw=2

runtime/menu.vim

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " You can also use this as a start for your own set of menus.
 "
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2013 May 17
+" Last Change:	2014 May 22
 
 " Note that ":an" (short for ":anoremenu") is often used to make a menu work
 " in all modes and avoid side effects from mappings defined by the user.
@@ -477,6 +477,7 @@ if has("folding")
   an 40.340.110 &Tools.&Folding.&Enable/Disable\ folds<Tab>zi		zi
   an 40.340.120 &Tools.&Folding.&View\ Cursor\ Line<Tab>zv		zv
   an 40.340.120 &Tools.&Folding.Vie&w\ Cursor\ Line\ only<Tab>zMzx	zMzx
+  inoremenu 40.340.120 &Tools.&Folding.Vie&w\ Cursor\ Line\ only<Tab>zMzx  <C-O>zM<C-O>zx
   an 40.340.130 &Tools.&Folding.C&lose\ more\ folds<Tab>zm		zm
   an 40.340.140 &Tools.&Folding.&Close\ all\ folds<Tab>zM		zM
   an 40.340.150 &Tools.&Folding.O&pen\ more\ folds<Tab>zr		zr

runtime/optwin.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " These commands create the option window.
 "
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2013 Jun 29
+" Last Change:	2014 Aug 06
 
 " If there already is an option window, jump to that one.
 if bufwinnr("option-window") > 0
@@ -324,6 +324,12 @@ call <SID>BinOptionG("wrap", &wrap)
 call append("$", "linebreak\twrap long lines at a character in 'breakat'")
 call append("$", "\t(local to window)")
 call <SID>BinOptionL("lbr")
+call append("$", "breakindent\tpreserve indentation in wrapped text")
+call append("$", "\t(local to window)")
+call <SID>BinOptionL("bri")
+call append("$", "breakindentopt\tadjust breakindent behaviour")
+call append("$", "\t(local to window)")
+call <SID>OptionL("briopt")
 call append("$", "breakat\twhich characters might cause a line break")
 call <SID>OptionG("brk", &brk)
 call append("$", "showbreak\tstring to put before wrapped screen lines")
@@ -600,6 +606,10 @@ if has("gui")
     call append("$", "guiheadroom\troom (in pixels) left above/below the window")
     call append("$", " \tset ghr=" . &ghr)
   endif
+  if has("directx")
+    call append("$", "renderoptions\toptions for text rendering")
+    call <SID>OptionG("rop", &rop)
+  endif
   call append("$", "guipty\tuse a pseudo-tty for I/O to external commands")
   call <SID>BinOptionG("guipty", &guipty)
   if has("browse")
@@ -855,7 +865,7 @@ if has("lispindent")
   call append("$", "\t(local to buffer)")
   call <SID>BinOptionL("lisp")
   call append("$", "lispwords\twords that change how lisp indenting works")
-  call <SID>OptionG("lw", &lw)
+  call <SID>OptionL("lw")
 endif
 
 

runtime/plugin/matchparen.vim

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " Vim plugin for showing matching parens
 " Maintainer:  Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change: 2013 May 08
+" Last Change: 2014 Jul 19
 
 " Exit quickly when:
 " - this plugin was already loaded (or disabled)
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ set cpo-=C
 function! s:Highlight_Matching_Pair()
   " Remove any previous match.
   if exists('w:paren_hl_on') && w:paren_hl_on
-    3match none
+    silent! call matchdelete(3)
     let w:paren_hl_on = 0
   endif
 
@@ -54,14 +54,15 @@ function! s:Highlight_Matching_Pair()
   let c_col = col('.')
   let before = 0
 
-  let c = getline(c_lnum)[c_col - 1]
+  let text = getline(c_lnum)
+  let c = text[c_col - 1]
   let plist = split(&matchpairs, '.\zs[:,]')
   let i = index(plist, c)
   if i < 0
     " not found, in Insert mode try character before the cursor
     if c_col > 1 && (mode() == 'i' || mode() == 'R')
       let before = 1
-      let c = getline(c_lnum)[c_col - 2]
+      let c = text[c_col - 2]
       let i = index(plist, c)
     endif
     if i < 0
@@ -87,14 +88,27 @@ function! s:Highlight_Matching_Pair()
   " Find the match.  When it was just before the cursor move it there for a
   " moment.
   if before > 0
-    let save_cursor = winsaveview()
+    let has_getcurpos = exists("*getcurpos")
+    if has_getcurpos
+      " getcurpos() is more efficient but doesn't exist before 7.4.313.
+      let save_cursor = getcurpos()
+    else
+      let save_cursor = winsaveview()
+    endif
     call cursor(c_lnum, c_col - before)
   endif
 
-  " When not in a string or comment ignore matches inside them.
+  " Build an expression that detects whether the current cursor position is in
+  " certain syntax types (string, comment, etc.), for use as searchpairpos()'s
+  " skip argument.
   " We match "escape" for special items, such as lispEscapeSpecial.
-  let s_skip ='synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 0), "name") ' .
-	\ '=~?  "string\\|character\\|singlequote\\|escape\\|comment"'
+  let s_skip = '!empty(filter(map(synstack(line("."), col(".")), ''synIDattr(v:val, "name")''), ' .
+	\ '''v:val =~? "string\\|character\\|singlequote\\|escape\\|comment"''))'
+  " If executing the expression determines that the cursor is currently in
+  " one of the syntax types, then we want searchpairpos() to find the pair
+  " within those syntax types (i.e., not skip).  Otherwise, the cursor is
+  " outside of the syntax types and s_skip should keep its value so we skip any
+  " matching pair inside the syntax types.
   execute 'if' s_skip '| let s_skip = 0 | endif'
 
   " Limit the search to lines visible in the window.
@@ -147,19 +161,27 @@ function! s:Highlight_Matching_Pair()
   endtry
 
   if before > 0
-    call winrestview(save_cursor)
+    if has_getcurpos
+      call setpos('.', save_cursor)
+    else
+      call winrestview(save_cursor)
+    endif
   endif
 
   " If a match is found setup match highlighting.
   if m_lnum > 0 && m_lnum >= stoplinetop && m_lnum <= stoplinebottom 
-    exe '3match MatchParen /\(\%' . c_lnum . 'l\%' . (c_col - before) .
-	  \ 'c\)\|\(\%' . m_lnum . 'l\%' . m_col . 'c\)/'
+    if exists('*matchaddpos')
+      call matchaddpos('MatchParen', [[c_lnum, c_col - before], [m_lnum, m_col]], 10, 3)
+    else
+      exe '3match MatchParen /\(\%' . c_lnum . 'l\%' . (c_col - before) .
+	    \ 'c\)\|\(\%' . m_lnum . 'l\%' . m_col . 'c\)/'
+    endif
     let w:paren_hl_on = 1
   endif
 endfunction
 
 " Define commands that will disable and enable the plugin.
-command! NoMatchParen windo 3match none | unlet! g:loaded_matchparen |
+command! NoMatchParen windo silent! call matchdelete(3) | unlet! g:loaded_matchparen |
 	  \ au! matchparen
 command! DoMatchParen runtime plugin/matchparen.vim | windo doau CursorMoved
 

runtime/plugin/netrwPlugin.vim

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " netrwPlugin.vim: Handles file transfer and remote directory listing across a network
 "            PLUGIN SECTION
-" Date:		Dec 31, 2013
+" Date:		Jan 22, 2014
 " Maintainer:	Charles E Campbell <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM-NOSPAM>
 " GetLatestVimScripts: 1075 1 :AutoInstall: netrw.vim
 " Copyright:    Copyright (C) 1999-2013 Charles E. Campbell {{{1
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@
 if &cp || exists("g:loaded_netrwPlugin")
  finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_netrwPlugin = "v150"
+let g:loaded_netrwPlugin = "v152"
 if v:version < 702
  echohl WarningMsg
  echo "***warning*** you need vim version 7.2 for this version of netrw"
@@ -43,6 +43,7 @@ set cpo&vim
 " Local Browsing Autocmds: {{{2
 augroup FileExplorer
  au!
+ au BufLeave *  if &ft != "netrw"|let w:netrw_prvfile= expand("%:p")|endif
  au BufEnter *	sil call s:LocalBrowse(expand("<amatch>"))
  au VimEnter *	sil call s:VimEnter(expand("<amatch>"))
  if has("win32") || has("win95") || has("win64") || has("win16")
@@ -66,11 +67,11 @@ augroup Network
 augroup END
 
 " Commands: :Nread, :Nwrite, :NetUserPass {{{2
-com! -count=1 -nargs=*	Nread		call netrw#NetrwSavePosn()<bar>call netrw#NetRead(<count>,<f-args>)<bar>call netrw#NetrwRestorePosn()
-com! -range=% -nargs=*	Nwrite		call netrw#NetrwSavePosn()<bar><line1>,<line2>call netrw#NetWrite(<f-args>)<bar>call netrw#NetrwRestorePosn()
+com! -count=1 -nargs=*	Nread		call netrw#SavePosn()<bar>call netrw#NetRead(<count>,<f-args>)<bar>call netrw#RestorePosn()
+com! -range=% -nargs=*	Nwrite		call netrw#SavePosn()<bar><line1>,<line2>call netrw#NetWrite(<f-args>)<bar>call netrw#RestorePosn()
 com! -nargs=*		NetUserPass	call NetUserPass(<f-args>)
-com! -nargs=*	        Nsource		call netrw#NetrwSavePosn()<bar>call netrw#NetSource(<f-args>)<bar>call netrw#NetrwRestorePosn()
-com! -nargs=?		Ntree		call netrw#NetrwSetTreetop(<q-args>)
+com! -nargs=*	        Nsource		call netrw#SavePosn()<bar>call netrw#NetSource(<f-args>)<bar>call netrw#RestorePosn()
+com! -nargs=?		Ntree		call netrw#SetTreetop(<q-args>)
 
 " Commands: :Explore, :Sexplore, Hexplore, Vexplore, Lexplore {{{2
 com! -nargs=* -bar -bang -count=0 -complete=dir	Explore		call netrw#Explore(<count>,0,0+<bang>0,<q-args>)
@@ -84,7 +85,7 @@ com! -nargs=* -bar       	  -complete=dir Lexplore	call netrw#Lexplore(<q-args>)
 
 " Commands: NetrwSettings {{{2
 com! -nargs=0	NetrwSettings	call netrwSettings#NetrwSettings()
-com! -bang	NetrwClean	call netrw#NetrwClean(<bang>0)
+com! -bang	NetrwClean	call netrw#Clean(<bang>0)
 
 " Maps:
 if !exists("g:netrw_nogx") && maparg('gx','n') == ""
@@ -118,11 +119,18 @@ fun! s:LocalBrowse(dirname)
 "   call Decho("(LocalBrowse) dirname<".a:dirname.">  (isdirectory, amiga)")
    if a:dirname != '' && isdirectory(a:dirname)
     sil! call netrw#LocalBrowseCheck(a:dirname)
+    if exists("w:netrw_bannercnt")
+     exe w:netrw_bannercnt
+    endif
    endif
 
   elseif isdirectory(a:dirname)
-"   call Decho("(LocalBrowse) dirname<".a:dirname.">  (isdirectory, not amiga)")
+"   call Decho("(LocalBrowse) dirname<".a:dirname."> ft=".&ft."  (isdirectory, not amiga)")
+"   call Dredir("LocalBrowse ft last set: ","verbose set ft")
    sil! call netrw#LocalBrowseCheck(a:dirname)
+   if exists("w:netrw_bannercnt")
+    exe w:netrw_bannercnt
+   endif
 
   else
    " not a directory, ignore it

runtime/synmenu.vim

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " This file is normally sourced from menu.vim.
 "
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2013 Jun 24
+" Last Change:	2014 Aug 13
 
 " Define the SetSyn function, used for the Syntax menu entries.
 " Set 'filetype' and also 'syntax' if it is manually selected.
@@ -326,6 +326,7 @@ an 50.70.270 &Syntax.M.Messages\ (/var/log) :cal SetSyn("messages")<CR>
 an 50.70.280 &Syntax.M.Metafont :cal SetSyn("mf")<CR>
 an 50.70.290 &Syntax.M.MetaPost :cal SetSyn("mp")<CR>
 an 50.70.300 &Syntax.M.MGL :cal SetSyn("mgl")<CR>
+an 50.70.305 &Syntax.M.MIX :cal SetSyn("mix")<CR>
 an 50.70.310 &Syntax.M.MMIX :cal SetSyn("mmix")<CR>
 an 50.70.320 &Syntax.M.Modconf :cal SetSyn("modconf")<CR>
 an 50.70.330 &Syntax.M.Model :cal SetSyn("model")<CR>

runtime/syntax/apache.vim

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 " Maintainer: David Necas (Yeti) <yeti@physics.muni.cz>
 " License: This file can be redistribued and/or modified under the same terms
 "		as Vim itself.
-" Last Change: 2013-09-16
+" Last Change: 2014-03-04
 " Notes: Last synced with apache-2.2.3, version 1.x is no longer supported
 " TODO: see particular FIXME's scattered through the file
 "		make it really linewise?
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ syn keyword apacheDeclaration PerlRestartHandler PerlDispatchHandler
 syn keyword apacheDeclaration PerlFreshRestart PerlSendHeader
 syn keyword apacheDeclaration php_value php_flag php_admin_value php_admin_flag
 syn match apacheSection "<\/\=\(Proxy\|ProxyMatch\)[^>]*>" contains=apacheAnything
-syn keyword apacheDeclaration AllowCONNECT NoProxy ProxyBadHeader ProxyBlock ProxyDomain ProxyErrorOverride ProxyIOBufferSize ProxyMaxForwards ProxyPass ProxyPassReverse ProxyPassReverseCookieDomain ProxyPassReverseCookiePath ProxyPreserveHost ProxyReceiveBufferSize ProxyRemote ProxyRemoteMatch ProxyRequests ProxyTimeout ProxyVia
+syn keyword apacheDeclaration AllowCONNECT NoProxy ProxyBadHeader ProxyBlock ProxyDomain ProxyErrorOverride ProxyIOBufferSize ProxyMaxForwards ProxyPass ProxyPassMatch ProxyPassReverse ProxyPassReverseCookieDomain ProxyPassReverseCookiePath ProxyPreserveHost ProxyReceiveBufferSize ProxyRemote ProxyRemoteMatch ProxyRequests ProxyTimeout ProxyVia
 syn keyword apacheDeclaration RewriteBase RewriteCond RewriteEngine RewriteLock RewriteLog RewriteLogLevel RewriteMap RewriteOptions RewriteRule
 syn keyword apacheOption inherit
 syn keyword apacheDeclaration BrowserMatch BrowserMatchNoCase SetEnvIf SetEnvIfNoCase

runtime/syntax/asm.vim

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 " Maintainer:	Erik Wognsen <erik.wognsen@gmail.com>
 "		Previous maintainer:
 "		Kevin Dahlhausen <kdahlhaus@yahoo.com>
-" Last Change:	2012 Apr 09
+" Last Change:	2014 Feb 04
 
 " Thanks to Ori Avtalion for feedback on the comment markers!
 
@@ -93,7 +93,11 @@ syn match asmCond		"\.endif"
 syn match asmMacro		"\.macro"
 syn match asmMacro		"\.endm"
 
-syn match asmDirective		"\.[a-z][a-z]\+"
+" Assembler directives start with a '.' and may contain upper case (e.g.,
+" .ABORT), numbers (e.g., .p2align), dash (e.g., .app-file) and underscore in
+" CFI directives (e.g., .cfi_startproc). This will also match labels starting
+" with '.', including the GCC auto-generated '.L' labels.
+syn match asmDirective		"\.[A-Za-z][0-9A-Za-z-_]*"
 
 
 syn case match

runtime/syntax/bib.vim

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " Language:	BibTeX (bibliographic database format for (La)TeX)
 " Maintainer:	Bernd Feige <Bernd.Feige@gmx.net>
 " Filenames:	*.bib
-" Last Change:	2011 Dec 25
+" Last Change:	2014 Mar 26
 
 " Thanks to those who pointed out problems with this file or supplied fixes!
 
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ syn keyword bibType contained	article book booklet conference inbook
 syn keyword bibType contained	incollection inproceedings manual
 syn keyword bibType contained	mastersthesis misc phdthesis
 syn keyword bibType contained	proceedings techreport unpublished
-syn keyword bibType contained	string
+syn keyword bibType contained	string preamble
 
 syn keyword bibEntryKw contained	address annote author booktitle chapter
 syn keyword bibEntryKw contained	crossref edition editor howpublished

runtime/syntax/c.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim syntax file
 " Language:	C
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2013 Jul 05
+" Last Change:	2014 May 26
 
 " Quit when a (custom) syntax file was already loaded
 if exists("b:current_syntax")
@@ -322,6 +322,9 @@ if !exists("c_no_ansi") || exists("c_ansi_constants") || exists("c_gnu")
   syn keyword cConstant SEEK_CUR SEEK_END SEEK_SET
   syn keyword cConstant TMP_MAX stderr stdin stdout
   syn keyword cConstant EXIT_FAILURE EXIT_SUCCESS RAND_MAX
+  " POSIX 2001
+  syn keyword cConstant SIGBUS SIGPOLL SIGPROF SIGSYS SIGURG
+  syn keyword cConstant SIGVTALRM SIGXCPU SIGXFSZ
   " Add POSIX errors as well
   syn keyword cConstant E2BIG EACCES EAGAIN EBADF EBADMSG EBUSY
   syn keyword cConstant ECANCELED ECHILD EDEADLK EDOM EEXIST EFAULT

runtime/syntax/cpp.vim

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " Language:	C++
 " Current Maintainer:	vim-jp (https://github.com/vim-jp/cpp-vim)
 " Previous Maintainer:	Ken Shan <ccshan@post.harvard.edu>
-" Last Change:	2012 Jun 14
+" Last Change:	2014 May 14
 
 " For version 5.x: Clear all syntax items
 " For version 6.x: Quit when a syntax file was already loaded
@@ -39,6 +39,7 @@ if !exists("cpp_no_cpp11")
   syn keyword cppExceptions	noexcept
   syn keyword cppStorageClass	constexpr decltype
   syn keyword cppConstant	nullptr
+  syn region cppRawString       matchgroup=cppRawDelimiter start=+\%(u8\|[uLU]\)\=R"\z([[:alnum:]_{}[\]#<>%:;.?*\+\-/\^&|~!=,"']\{,16}\)(+ end=+)\z1"+ contains=@Spell
 endif
 
 " The minimum and maximum operators in GNU C++
@@ -62,6 +63,8 @@ if version >= 508 || !exists("did_cpp_syntax_inits")
   HiLink cppStructure		Structure
   HiLink cppBoolean		Boolean
   HiLink cppConstant		Constant
+  HiLink cppRawDelimiter	Delimiter
+  HiLink cppRawString		String
   delcommand HiLink
 endif
 

runtime/syntax/datascript.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim syntax file
 " Language:	Datascript
 " Maintainer:	Dominique Pelle <dominique.pelle@gmail.com>
-" Last Change:	2012 Apr 30
+" Last Change:	2014 Feb 26
 "
 " DataScript is a formal language for modelling binary datatypes,
 " bitstreams or file formats. For more information, see:
@@ -16,8 +16,8 @@ let s:keepcpo= &cpo
 set cpo&vim
 
 syn keyword dsPackage      import package
-syn keyword dsType         bit string
-syn keyword dsType         int8 int16 int32 int64
+syn keyword dsType         bit bool string
+syn keyword dsType         int int8 int16 int32 int64
 syn keyword dsType         uint8 uint16 uint32 uint64
 syn keyword dsType         leint16 leint32 leint64
 syn keyword dsType         leuint16 leuint32 leuint64
@@ -25,13 +25,14 @@ syn keyword dsEndian       little big
 syn keyword dsAlign        align
 syn keyword dsLabel        case default
 syn keyword dsConditional  if condition
-syn keyword dsCompound     union choice on enum bitmask subtype
+syn keyword dsBoolean      true false
+syn keyword dsCompound     union choice on enum bitmask subtype explicit
 syn keyword dsKeyword      function return
 syn keyword dsOperator     sizeof bitsizeof lengthof is sum forall in
 syn keyword dsStorageClass const
 syn keyword dsTodo         contained TODO FIXME XXX
-syn keyword dsSql          sql sql_table sql_database sql_pragma
-syn keyword dsSql          sql_integer sql_metadata sql_key
+syn keyword dsSql          sql sql_table sql_database sql_pragma sql_index
+syn keyword dsSql          sql_integer sql_metadata sql_key foreign_key
 
 " dsCommentGroup allows adding matches for special things in comments.
 syn cluster dsCommentGroup  contains=dsTodo
@@ -70,6 +71,7 @@ hi def link dsOffset            Label
 hi def link dsSql               PreProc
 hi def link dsCompound          Structure
 hi def link dsConditional       Conditional
+hi def link dsBoolean           Boolean
 hi def link dsKeyword           Statement
 hi def link dsString            String
 hi def link dsNumber            Number

runtime/syntax/debchangelog.vim

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 " Maintainer:  Debian Vim Maintainers <pkg-vim-maintainers@lists.alioth.debian.org>
 " Former Maintainers: Gerfried Fuchs <alfie@ist.org>
 "                     Wichert Akkerman <wakkerma@debian.org>
-" Last Change: 2013 May 05
+" Last Change: 2014 Jul 11
 " URL: http://anonscm.debian.org/hg/pkg-vim/vim/raw-file/unstable/runtime/syntax/debchangelog.vim
 
 " Standard syntax initialization
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ syn case ignore
 " Define some common expressions we can use later on
 syn match debchangelogName	contained "^[[:alnum:]][[:alnum:].+-]\+ "
 syn match debchangelogUrgency	contained "; urgency=\(low\|medium\|high\|critical\|emergency\)\( \S.*\)\="
-syn match debchangelogTarget	contained "\v %(frozen|unstable|%(testing|%(old)=stable)%(-proposed-updates|-security)=|experimental|squeeze-%(backports%(-sloppy)=|volatile)|wheezy-backports|%(lucid|precise|quantal|raring|saucy)%(-%(security|proposed|updates|backports|commercial|partner))=)+"
+syn match debchangelogTarget	contained "\v %(frozen|unstable|%(testing|%(old)=stable)%(-proposed-updates|-security)=|experimental|squeeze-%(backports%(-sloppy)=|volatile)|wheezy-backports|%(devel|lucid|precise|trusty|utopic)%(-%(security|proposed|updates|backports|commercial|partner))=)+"
 syn match debchangelogVersion	contained "(.\{-})"
 syn match debchangelogCloses	contained "closes:\_s*\(bug\)\=#\=\_s\=\d\+\(,\_s*\(bug\)\=#\=\_s\=\d\+\)*"
 syn match debchangelogLP	contained "\clp:\s\+#\d\+\(,\s*#\d\+\)*"

runtime/syntax/debcontrol.vim

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 " Maintainer:  Debian Vim Maintainers <pkg-vim-maintainers@lists.alioth.debian.org>
 " Former Maintainers: Gerfried Fuchs <alfie@ist.org>
 "                     Wichert Akkerman <wakkerma@debian.org>
-" Last Change: 2013 May 05
+" Last Change: 2014 May 01
 " URL: http://anonscm.debian.org/hg/pkg-vim/vim/raw-file/unstable/runtime/syntax/debcontrol.vim
 
 " Standard syntax initialization
@@ -13,6 +13,9 @@ elseif exists("b:current_syntax")
   finish
 endif
 
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo&vim
+
 " Should match case except for the keys of each field
 syn case match
 
@@ -23,8 +26,17 @@ syn match debcontrolElse "^.*$"
 syn match debControlComma ", *"
 syn match debControlSpace " "
 
+let s:kernels = '\%(linux\|hurd\|kfreebsd\|knetbsd\|kopensolaris\|netbsd\)'
+let s:archs = '\%(alpha\|amd64\|armeb\|armel\|armhf\|arm64\|avr32\|hppa\|i386'
+      \ . '\|ia64\|lpia\|m32r\|m68k\|mipsel\|mips\|powerpcspe\|powerpc\|ppc64el'
+      \ . '\|ppc64\|s390x\|s390\|sh3eb\|sh3\|sh4eb\|sh4\|sh\|sparc64\|sparc\|x32\)'
+let s:pairs = 'hurd-i386\|kfreebsd-i386\|kfreebsd-amd64\|knetbsd-i386\|kopensolaris-i386\|netbsd-alpha\|netbsd-i386'
+
 " Define some common expressions we can use later on
-syn match debcontrolArchitecture contained "\%(all\|linux-any\|\%(any-\)\=\%(alpha\|amd64\|arm\%(e[bl]\|hf\)\=\|avr32\|hppa\|i386\|ia64\|lpia\|m32r\|m68k\|mips\%(el\)\=\|powerpc\|ppc64\|s390x\=\|sh[34]\(eb\)\=\|sh\|sparc\%(64\)\=\)\|hurd-\%(i386\|any\)\|kfreebsd-\%(i386\|amd64\|any\)\|knetbsd-\%(i386\|any\)\|kopensolaris-\%(i386\|any\)\|netbsd-\%(alpha\|i386\|any\)\|any\)"
+exe 'syn match debcontrolArchitecture contained "\%(all\|'. s:kernels .'-any\|\%(any-\)\='. s:archs .'\|'. s:pairs .'\|any\)"'
+
+unlet s:kernels s:archs s:pairs
+
 syn match debcontrolMultiArch contained "\%(no\|foreign\|allowed\|same\)"
 syn match debcontrolName contained "[a-z0-9][a-z0-9+.-]\+"
 syn match debcontrolPriority contained "\(extra\|important\|optional\|required\|standard\)"
@@ -108,4 +120,7 @@ endif
 
 let b:current_syntax = "debcontrol"
 
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save
+
 " vim: ts=8 sw=2

runtime/syntax/debsources.vim

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " Language:     Debian sources.list
 " Maintainer:   Debian Vim Maintainers <pkg-vim-maintainers@lists.alioth.debian.org>
 " Former Maintainer: Matthijs Mohlmann <matthijs@cacholong.nl>
-" Last Change: 2013 May 05
+" Last Change: 2014 Jul 11
 " URL: http://anonscm.debian.org/hg/pkg-vim/vim/raw-file/unstable/runtime/syntax/debsources.vim
 
 " Standard syntax initialization
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ syn match debsourcesComment        /#.*/  contains=@Spell
 
 " Match uri's
 syn match debsourcesUri            +\(http://\|ftp://\|[rs]sh://\|debtorrent://\|\(cdrom\|copy\|file\):\)[^' 	<>"]\++
-syn match debsourcesDistrKeyword   +\([[:alnum:]_./]*\)\(squeeze\|wheezy\|\(old\)\=stable\|testing\|unstable\|sid\|rc-buggy\|experimental\|lucid\|precise\|quantal\|raring\|saucy\)\([-[:alnum:]_./]*\)+
+syn match debsourcesDistrKeyword   +\([[:alnum:]_./]*\)\(squeeze\|wheezy\|jessie\|\(old\)\=stable\|testing\|unstable\|sid\|rc-buggy\|experimental\|devel\|lucid\|precise\|trusty\|utopic\)\([-[:alnum:]_./]*\)+
 
 " Associate our matches and regions with pretty colours
 hi def link debsourcesLine            Error

runtime/syntax/django.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim syntax file
 " Language:	Django template
 " Maintainer:	Dave Hodder <dmh@dmh.org.uk>
-" Last Change:	2012 Apr 09
+" Last Change:	2014 Jul 13
 
 " For version 5.x: Clear all syntax items
 " For version 6.x: Quit when a syntax file was already loaded
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ syn region djangoTagBlock start="{%" end="%}" contains=djangoStatement,djangoFil
 syn region djangoVarBlock start="{{" end="}}" contains=djangoFilter,djangoArgument,djangoVarError display
 
 " Django template 'comment' tag and comment block
-syn region djangoComment start="{%\s*comment\s*%}" end="{%\s*endcomment\s*%}" contains=djangoTodo
+syn region djangoComment start="{%\s*comment\(\s\+.\{-}\)\?%}" end="{%\s*endcomment\s*%}" contains=djangoTodo
 syn region djangoComBlock start="{#" end="#}" contains=djangoTodo
 
 " Define the default highlighting.

runtime/syntax/dnsmasq.vim

@@ -4,8 +4,8 @@
 "		:3s+-foo++g
 " Description:	highlight dnsmasq configuration files
 " File:		runtime/syntax/dnsmasq.vim
-" Version:	2.67
-" Last Change:	2013 Nov 03
+" Version:	2.70
+" Last Change:	2014 Apr 30
 " Modeline:	vim: ts=8:sw=2:sts=2:
 "
 " License:	VIM License
@@ -132,6 +132,9 @@ syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*dhcp-subscrid\>"
 syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*dhcp-userclass\>"
 syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*dhcp-vendorclass\>"
 syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*dns-rr\>"
+syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*dnssec\>"
+syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*dnssec-check-unsigned\>"
+syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*dnssec-no-timecheck\>"
 syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*dns-forward-max\>"
 syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*domain\>"
 syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*domain-needed\>"
@@ -153,6 +156,7 @@ syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*listen-address\>"
 syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*local\>"
 syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*localmx\>"
 syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*local-ttl\>"
+syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*local-service\>"
 syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*localise-queries\>"
 syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*log-async\>"
 syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*log-dhcp\>"
@@ -187,8 +191,10 @@ syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*read-ethers\>"
 syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*rebind-domain-ok\>"
 syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*rebind-localhost-ok\>"
 syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*resolv-file\>"
+syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*rev-server\>"
 syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*selfmx\>"
 syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*server\>"
+syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*servers-file\>"
 syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*srv-host\>"
 syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*stop-dns-rebind\>"
 syn match DnsmasqKeyword    "^\s*strict-order\>"